Home

PDF - niveo professional

1. Port The port number for which the configuration below applies QoS class Controls the default QoS class i e the QoS class for frames not classified in any other way There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority DP level Controls the default Drop Precedence Level i e the DP level for frames not classified in any other way PCP Controls the default PCP for untagged frames DEI Controls the default DEI for untagged frames NGSME16T2H User Manual 174 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Tag Class Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port Disabled Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and or mapping DSCP Based Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 175 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul QoS Ingress Port Policer Config This page allows you to configure the Policer settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed settings are Managed GigaBit
2. Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID If Limit Control is enabled on a port the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port If this number is exceeded an action is taken The action can be one of the four different actions as described below The Limit Control module utilizes a lower layer module Port Security module which manages MAC addresses learnt on the port The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide NGSME16T2H User Manual 67 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul System Configuration Mode Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Ge Limit Control Configuration Fortet System Cenfiguration Mode heating z Aging Endes TEN os Enacied Pors Configuration Port Mos Umi Acton Siste Reopen Aging Enabled If checked secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period Aging Period If Aging Period is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other re
3. disable enable remap_dp_unaware remap_dp_aware Note DSCP is an advanced QoS setting please follow the DSCP table of upper access core switch to configure the table The table of the whole network must be unified Storm Configuration Strom Control Syntax QoS Storm Unicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt QoS Storm Multicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt QoS Storm Broadcast enable disable lt packet_rate gt lt packet_rate gt Rate in fps 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k 32k 64k 128k 256k 512k 1024k 2048k 4096k 8192k 16384k 32768k Example QoS Storm gt unic en 32768k QoS Storm gt multi en 4096k QoS Storm gt broad en 4k NGSME16T2H User Manual 257 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Mirroring Configuration Mirroring Configuration Mirror Configuration Syntax Mirror Port lt port gt disable Mirror Mode lt port_cpu_list gt enable disable rx tx Exampl e Mirror gt port 5 Mirror gt mode 6 8 en Result Mirror Configuration Mirror Port 5 Port Mode Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled NGSME16T2H User Manual 258 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI UPnP Configuration UPnP Configuration UPnp Configuration Syntax UPnP Configuration UPnP Mode enable dis
4. iB kay NE TOOTH Fat tere Ea General Components checked are used by thiscon You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for La NwLink NetBIOS the appropriate IP settings vY NWLink IPX SPX NetBIOS Compe Y Internet Protocol TCP IP Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address ie ae IP address 192 168 2 30 nstall Uninstall Description Subnet mask 25 25 25 0 Transmission Control Protocol Internet P Default gateway i wide area network protocol that provide across diverse interconnected networks C Obtain DNS server address automatically IV Show icon in taskbar when connected _ Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server 5 Alternate DNS server i Advanced Cancel NGSME16T2H User Manual 22 Chapter 2 Preparing for Management Preparing for Management Launch the web browser and Login Launch the web browser Internet Explorer or Mozila Firefox on the PC Type http 192 168 2 1 or the IP address of the switch And then press Enter The login screen will appear next eo ot Key in the password Default user name and password are both admin If you can t login the switch the following steps can help you to identify the problem 1 Switch to DO
5. ACL Access Control List ACL Port Configuration Syntax Security Network ACL Action lt port_list gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_redirect gt lt mirror gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports permit Permit forwarding default deny Deny forwarding lt rate_limiter gt Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable lt port_redirect gt Port list for copy of frames or disable lt mirror gt Mirror of frames enable disable lt logging gt System logging of frames log log_disable lt shutdown gt Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable Example NGSME16T2H User Manual 220 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Security Network ACL gt Action 1 permit 10 dis en log shut Result ACL Configuration Port Policy Action RateL PortC Mirror Logging Shutdown Counter 1 0 Permit 10 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled 0 Rate Limiter Syntax Security Network ACL Rate lt rate_limiter_list gt lt rate_unit gt lt rate gt Parameters lt rate_limiter_list gt Rate limiter list 1 16 default All rate limiters lt rate unit gt IP flags pps kbps default pss lt rate gt Rate in pps 0 100 or kbps 0 100 25100 3 100 1000000 Example Rate Limiter ID 10 Rate 300kbps Security Network ACL gt rate 10 kbps 300 Result Rat
6. Web Ul Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 168 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul VCL IP Subnet based VLAN The IP subnet based VLAN enties can be configured here This page allows for adding updating and deleting IP subnet based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This page shows only static entries PoE GigaBit Ethernet Switch IP Subnet based VLAN Membership Configuration Auto refresh E Refresh Port Members Delete VCE ID IP Address Mask Length VLAN ID 1 2 3 415 6 7 8 9 10 14 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 192 168 2100 24 Eee Ha i Add New Entry Save Reset Delete To delete a IP subnet based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry will be deleted in the stack VCE ID Indicates the index of the entry It is user configurable It s value ranges from 0 256 If a VCE ID is 0 application will auto generate the VCE ID for that entry Deletion and lookup of IP subnet based VLAN are based on VCE ID IP Address Indicates the IP address Mask Length Indicates the network mask length VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID VLAN ID can be changed for the existing e
7. gt Security Power Management Mode Actual Consumption Reserved Power Aggregation Loop Protection PoE Power Supply Configuration gt Spanning Tree MVR Primary Power Supply W gt IPMC vLLDP 2000 LLDP N n s LLDP MED PoE Port Configuration PoE MAC Table Port PoE Mode Priority Maximum Power W v VLANs ao o fr 15 4 VLAN Membership Ports 1 PoE 7 Low 15 4 gt Private VLAN 2 Po e Low gt 154 Voice VLAN 3 PoE low 154 gt QoS Mirroring 4 PoE x Low 15 4 UPnP 5 El 5 PoE Low m 15 4 v Monitor 6 PoE kd Low 15 4 gt System gt Ports 7 PoE Low E 154 Security 5 LACP 8 PoE Low 15 4 Loop Protection 9 PoE Low 15 4 Spanning Tree ia 10 PoE e Low 154 HPMC 11 PoE e Low fx 15 4 HLLDP PoE 12 PoE e Low x 15 4 a Tabie 13 PoE E low E 154 m Power Over Ethernet Configuration Reserved Power determined by There are three modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power 1 Allocation mode In this mode the user allocates the amount of power that each port may reserve The allocated reserved power for each port PDs specified in the Maximum Power fields 2 Class mode In this mode each port automatically determines how much power to reserve according to the class the connected PD belongs to and reserves the power accordingly Four different port classes exist and one for 4 7 15 4
8. 1 ow Aus x x z wa Aut x x x 6 w Auto x x o aito x x T o Auto x x a oxn Aik x x ow Aue x x z 0 Gow aus x x p n ow Aam x x 2 om Aito x x 12 own Aiso x x 4 1063 Auto x x x 6 ow Aas x x wae vm ow Aam x x wa 1 ow au x x ean n on Aiso x gt sen g 19 o Aus x x wa am ow Mas x x ce gt n OG ow ue 10 3 x x an 2 ow Au Tx x x set n om fuse 1000 x x nee 24 Arto 1090X x x pe 53 o Auto x x 2600 m on Auto x x 3000 Sara Reset Port This is the port number for this row Link The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down Current Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port Ex 1Gfdx 1G indicates the Gigabit Speed fdx indicates the Full Duplex Mode Configured Link Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Auto Speed selects the highest speed that is compatible with a link partner Disabled disables the switch port operation Fiber Speed Configure speed for fiber port Note Port speed for the Copper ports will automatically be set to Auto when dual media is selected Disable SFPs Copper port only SFP Auto automatically determines the speed at the SFP Note There is no standardized way to do SFP auto detect so here it is done by reading the SFP rom Due to the missing standardized way of doing SFP auto detect some SFPs might not be detectable
9. Appendix B IP Configuration for Your PC 5 An Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window will pop up Please set your PC s IP address and subnet mask as shown in the figure down below By default your product s IP address should be 192 168 2 1 You can set any IP address as long as it s not the same with your product s IP address and is in the same network segment with your product s IP address Press OK to apply the TCP IPv4 settings you just made Now you can connect to your product using a web browser i e Internet Explorer Chrome or Firefox General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 168 2 33 Subnet mask 255 255 0 Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Validate settings upon exit NGSME16T2H User Manual 366
10. Challenges backend server has communication with the switch MAC based Counts all Access Challenges received from the backend server for this port left most table or client NGSME16T2H User Manual 288 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Other Requests Auth Successes Auth Failures Responses right most table 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch sends an EAP Request packet following the first to the dot1xAuthBackendOtherRequests loSupplicant supplicant Indicates that the dot1xAuthBackendAuthSuccesses dot1xAuthBackendAuthFails dot1xAuthBackendResponses backend server chose an EAP method MAC based Not applicable 802 1X and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a success indication Indicates that the supplicant client has successfully authenticated to the backend server 802 1X and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a failure message This indicates that the supplicant client has not authenticated to the backend server 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch attempts to send a supplicant s first response packet to the backend server Indicates the switch attempted communication with the backend server Possible retransmissions are not counted MAC based Counts all the backend server NGSME16T2H User Manual 289 Ch
11. Example PVLAN gt add 10 9 12 PVLAN gt add 10 1 2 PVLAN gt add 20 1 2 PVLAN gt add 20 13 18 PVLAN gt iso 9 18 en Enable Isolated Ports Result PVLAN ID Ports 1 1 8 17 26 10 1 2 20 13 18 NGSME16T2H User Manual 249 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI VCL Configuration MAC based VLAN Configuration MAC based VLAN Configuration Syntax VCL Macvlan Add lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt lt port_list gt Example VCL Macvlan gt add 001122334455 10 1 4 Result VCL Macvlan gt conf MAC Address VID Ports 00 0b 16 21 2c 37 10 1 4 Protocol based VLAN Configuration Protocol to Group Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Eth2 lt ether_type gt arplip ipx at lt group_id gt Example VCL ProtoVlan gt protocol add Eth2 0x0808 E4 Group to VLAN Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Vlan Add lt port_list gt lt group_id gt lt vid gt Example VCL ProtoVlan gt vlan add 1 8 E4 10 Protocol VLAN Configuration Result VCL ProtoVlan gt conf Protocol Type Protocol Value Group ID NGSME16T2H User Manual 250 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Ethernetll ETYPE 0x808 E4 LLC Other DSAP 0xff SSAP 0xff L3 LLC SNAP OUI 00 e0 2b PID 0x1 2 Etherneltll ETYPE 0x800 E1 Group ID VID Ports E4 10 1 8 E1 10 5 8 IP Subnet based VLAN Configuration IP Subnet based Syntax
12. IP Subnet based VLAN Delete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values 1 Ethernet 2 LLC 3 SNAP Note On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the the preceding Frame Type selection menu Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types For Ethernet Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600 Oxffff For LLC Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub values a DSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 0xff b SSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 0xff NGSME16T2H User Manual 165 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul For SNAP Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub values a OUI OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier is value in format of xx xx xx where each pair xx in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from 0x00 0xff b PID If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000 the protocol ID is the Ethernet type EtherType field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization the protocol ID is a value ass
13. IPMC Proxy midligmp enable disable Example IPMC gt proxy igmp en Enable NGSME16T2H User Manual 239 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI IPMC gt proxy igmp dis Disable Port Related Configuration Router Port Fast Leave Throttling Syntax IPMC Router mldligmp lt port list gt enable disable IPMC Fastleave mid igmp lt port list gt enable disable IPMC Throttling mldligmp lt port_list gt limit group number Example IPMG gt router igmp 25 26 en Port 25 26 are router ports IPMC gt Fast igmp 1 24 en Enable IGMP Fast Leave on P1 24 IPMCsthro igmp 1 25 Throtting of Port 1 2 is 5 groups VLAN Configuration Syntax IPMC State mld igmp lt vid gt enable disable IPMC Querier mld igmp lt vid gt enable disable IPMC Compatibility mldligmp lt vid gt auto v1 v2 v3 IPMC Parameter RV mldligmp lt vid gt jpmc param rv IPMC Parameter QI mld igmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_qi IPMC Parameter QRI mld igmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_qri IPMC Parameter LLQI midligmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_llqi IPMC Parameter URI mld igmp lt vid gt jpmc param uri Example IPMC gt state igmp 2 en Enable IGMP Snooping on VLAN 2 IPMC gt quer igmp 2 en Enable IGMP Querier on VLAN 2 IPMC gt compa igmp 2 v2 Enable IGMPv2 on VLAN 2 MLD Snooping MLD Snooping Note The MLD Snooping is a
14. Security Network DHCP Relay Mode enable disable Security Network DHCP Relay Server lt ip addr gt Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode enable disable Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy replace keep drop NGSME16T2H User Manual 224 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Example Security Network gt dhep relay server 192 168 2 100 Security Network gt dhcp relay mode en Assign one Server IP before enable the Relay mode Security Network gt dhcp rel info mode en Security Network gt dhcp rel info policy keep IP Source Guard IP Source Guard Configuration Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration Security Network IP Source Guard Mode enable disable Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Security Network IP Source Guard limit lt port_list gt lt dynamic_entry_limit gt unlimited Security Network IP Source Guard Entry lt port_list gt add delete lt vid gt lt allowed_ip gt lt allowed_mac gt Security Network IP Source Guard Status lt port_list gt Security Network IP Source Guard Translation Example Security Network gt ip source guard mode en Security Network gt ip source guard port mode 1 10 en Port 1 10 Security Network gt ip source guard limit 1 10 2 limit 2 MAC Address IP Source Guard Static Table Syntax Security Network IP Source Gu
15. VLAN Configuration YCL IPVlan Add lt vce_id gt lt ip_addr_mask gt lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vce_id gt Unique VCE ID for each VCL entry lt ip_addr_mask gt Source IP address and mask Format a b c d n lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt port list gt Port list or all default All ports Example VCL IPVIan gt add 1 192 168 10 0 24 10 1 10 Result VCE ID IP Address Mask Length VID Ports 1 192 168 10 0 24 10 1 10 NGSME16T2H User Manual 251 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Voice VLAN Configuration Voice VLAN Configuration Voice VLAN Configuration Syntax Voice VLAN Mode enable disable Voice VLAN ID lt vid gt Voice VLAN Agetime lt age_time gt Voice VLAN Traffic Class lt class gt Example Voice gt vlan mode en Voice gt vlan id 100 Voice gt vlan age 86400 Voice gt vlan traff class 7 Result Voice VLAN Configuration Voice VLAN Mode Enabled Voice VLAN VLAN ID 100 Voice VLAN Age Time seconds 86400 Voice VLAN Traffic Class 7 Port Configuration Syntax Voice VLAN Port Mode lt port list gt disable auto force Voice VLAN Security lt port_list gt enable disable Voice VLAN Discovery Protocol lt port_list gt ouillldp both Example Voice VLAN gt port mode 1 4 auto Voice VLAN gt security 1 4 en Voice VLAN gt disco pro 1 4 both Result Voice VLAN Port Conf
16. decremented due to receipt of a Response timeout or retransmission The number of accounting timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different radiusAccClientExtTimeout Timeouts s Other Info server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values Not Ready Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running aReady The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting NGSME16T2H User Manual 308 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Response and the Request that ma
17. gt VLANs Broadcast a 1 X gt Private VLANs gt VCL rer Voice VLAN Save Reset Configuration oul v QoS J Port Classification i Port Policing Port Scheduler DSCP Classi q QoS Control List Storm Control There is a unicast storm rate control multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch Note Frames which are sent to the CPU of the switch are always limited to approximately 4 kpps For example broadcasts in the management VLAN are limited to this rate The management VLAN is configured on the IP setup page Frame Type The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here Unicast Multicast or Broadcast Enable Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type Rate The rate unit is packets per second pps Valid values are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K 102 4K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 189 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Mirroring Configuration
18. sesh JO a Lm 8 g 2 a 2 3 2 2 21 Port The switch port number of the logical STP port MSTP The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port TCN The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s received transmitted on the port Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Discarded Illegal The number of illegal Soanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 322 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance MVR Status Statistics This page provides MVR Statistics information Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch VLAN ID The Multicast VLAN ID V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports V2 Leaves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears all Statistics counters Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular interv
19. 1000 X force SFP speed to 1000 X 100 FX force SFP speed to 100 FX NGSME16T2H User Manual 38 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected on a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed Maximum Frame Size Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS The switch supports up to 9K Jumbo Frame Excessive Collision Mode Configure port transmit collision behavior Discard Discard frame after 16 collisions default Restart Restart backoff algoritnm after 16 collisions Power Control The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled PerfectReach Link up power savings enabled Enabled Both link up and link down power savings enabled Buttons Save
20. Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI poeswitch IP gt ipv6 ping6 2001 DB8 250 8bff fees f800 VeriPHY Syntax Port VeriPHY lt port_list gt Example Port gt veriphy 24 Starting VeriPHY please wait Port PairA Length PairB Length PairC Length PairD Length 24 OK 0 OK 0 OK 0 OK 0 NGSME16T2H User Manual 263 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Maintenance Commands Maintenance Commands Restart Device Syntax System Reboot Example System gt reb System will reboot in a few seconds Factory Defaults Syntax System Restore Default keep_ip Example Software Firmware Firmware Version Firmware Swapping Firmware Update Syntax Firmware Information Firmware Swap Firmware Load lt ip_addr_string gt lt file_name gt Parameters of Firmware Load lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt file_name gt Firmware file name Example Firmware Swapping Firmware gt sw Erase from 0x40fd0000 0x40fdffff Program from 0x87ff0000 0x88000000 to 0x40fd0000 Program from 0x87ff000a 0x87ff000c to 0x40fd000a Alternate image activated now rebooting Firmware Update NGSME16T2H User Manual 264 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Firmware gt load 192 168 2 100 SMBStaX dat Downlo
21. Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Click to refresh the page Any changes made locally will be undone NGSME16T2H User Manual 39 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Security Configuration The Security Configuration feature includes 3 sub titles Switch Network and AAA Security Switch The switch settings includes User Database Privilege Levels Authentication Method SSH HTTPs Access Management SNMP and RMON setting Following are the topic and configuration guide Security Switch Users Configuration This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser This page configures a user This is also a link to Add User amp Edit User Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Users Configuration Add New User Edit User Click Add New User the configuration page goes to Add Managed Gig Edit User User screen You can see the User Setting table follow the below ee instruction to fill the table Click the created User Name the page goes to Edit User screen you can change the settings on it User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and undersc
22. Configure port Mirroring on this page To debug network problems selected traffic can be copied or mirrored on a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow The traffic to be copied on the mirror port is selected as follows All frames received on a given port also known as ingress or source mirroring All frames transmitted on a given port also known as egress or destination mirroring Port to mirror on Port to mirror also known as the mirror port Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored on this port Disabled disables mirroring Mirror Port Configuration The following table is used for Rx and Tx enabling Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Mode Select mirror mode Rx only Frames received on this port are mirrored on the mirror port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Tx only Frames transmitted on this port are mirrored on the mirror port Frames received are not mirrored Disabled Neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored on the mirror port NGSME16T2H User Manual 190 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Note For a given port a frame is only transmitted once It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on the mirror port Because of this mode for the
23. Example Configure port 5 8 to a LACP group gt lacp mode 5 8 en Mode Enable gt lacp key 5 8 100 Key 100 gt lacp role 5 8 act Role Enable NGSME16T2H User Manual 231 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Loop Protection General Settings Enable Loop Syntax Protection Loop Protect Mode enable disable Loop Protect Transmit lt transmit time gt Loop Protect Shutdown lt shutdown time gt Example gt loop protect mode en Transmission Time gt loop protect trans 10 10 seconds Shutdown Time gt loop protect shut 200 200 seconds Port Configuration Loop Protection Port Syntax Configuration Loop Protect Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Loop Protect Port Action lt port_list gt shutdown shut log log Loop Protect Port Transmit lt port_list gt enable disable Example Loop Protect gt port mode 1 en Loop Protect gt port action 1 shut_log Shutdown Port and Log Loop Protect gt port transmit 1 en NGSME16T2H User Manual 232 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Spanning Tree Bridge Configuration Protocol Version Syntax STP Version lt stp_version gt Parameters lt stp_version gt mstp rstp stp Example STP gt ver rstp Bridge Priority Syntax STP Msti Priority lt msti gt lt priority gt Example STP
24. LAGP Dynamic Aggregatlon i suhuisesmismniedemselitdnenelsrdnmiul ft ieuiuj ue 112 Loop gl alge le 0 A eee ce eee ee 114 Spanning Tree eee eee ee nee ene ee EEEE EE Enner EEE 116 Spanning Tree Bridge Setting eee eee eee ee eee e ee eee renee aa eee eater ett aaaeeeeeeee ernie 117 Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping rrnnnnnnoorrnnnnrrrnnnnnnnonrnnnnnrrnnnnnnenerrnnnnnrrnnnnnnsserrnnnnrrnnnnnenesene 119 Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities 0 0 tana eset eee ttneenaaeeeeeeeee enna 120 Spanning Tree CIST Ports rrnnnnrrnnnnnnnonnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnonrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnonrnnnnnnrnnnnnnenennnnnnrrnnnnnensnenr 121 Spanning Tree MSTI Ports iiceicircdieciiciednmebnninmmnien eh emma 124 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration cccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneserenenegs 125 IPMC IP Multicast Lu vsjosqestesutsenmenden atte ne nice detected are seder 127 IGMP Snooping Configuration cece eee enn eee eee aae sense eee eteneeaaeeeeeeeeeteee 127 Basic CoOntiquratl niriccsiciccncimunvinedimuntinnnbmmidmumibmennma EKEN EEEa EEEE REA EENET 127 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration cece eect teen e eee e tree eeeneaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaaaees 130 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering 00 cece eee e ee ceeeee teeter ee eeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeteeneaaaees 132 MLD Snooping Configuration cence etter aee eee e eee etneceaaeeeeeeee enna
25. Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Management Address Management Address is the neighbor unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbor s IP address Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 336 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance LLDP MED Neighbors This page provides a status overview of all LLDP MED neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected This function applies to VoIP devices which support LLDP MED The columns hold the following information Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received Device Type LLDP MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device Definition LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in TIA 1057 provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies 1 LAN Switch Router IEEE 802 1 Bridge IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons IEEE 802 11 Wi
26. NTP is short of Network Time Protocol Network Time Protocol NTP is used to synchronize time clocks on the internet You can configure NTP Servers IP address here to synchronize the clocks of the remote time server on the network This page indicates the NTP mode operation Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Configurat e ren NTP Configuration Mode Deatied Mode The Possible modes are Enable NTP mode operation When NTP mode operation is enabled the agent forwards NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain Disable NTP mode operation Server Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 32 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul System Log Configuration System Log is useful to provide system administrator monitor switch events history The switch supports syslog serv
27. The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled on all ports Guest VLAN Enabled A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1 X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled on all ports Guest VLAN ID This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4095 Max Reauth Count The number of times the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 255 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen The switch remember
28. This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed settings are Managed G ygaBit Ethernet Switch QoS Port DSCr Configuretion om See arm ene Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and egress settings Ingress In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress 1 Translate 2 Classify 1 Translate To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox 2 Classify Classification for a port have 4 different values Disabled No Ingress DSCP Classification DSCP 0 Classify if incoming or translated if enabled DSCP is 0 Selected Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP All Classify all DSCP NGSME16T2H User Manual 180 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Egress Port Egress Rewriting can be one of Disabled No Egress rewrite Enable Rewrite enabled without remapping Remap DP Unaware DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value The remapped DSCP value is always taken from the DSCP Translation gt Egress
29. Whether a loop is currently detected on the port The time of the last loop event detected Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals STP Bridge Status This page provides a status overview of all STP bridge instances NGSME16T2H User Manual 319 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Bridge Status The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance where the column displays the following information Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Ge STP Bridges Am verst Refresh gt Comfigeration Monier MSTI The Bridge Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status Bridge ID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance Root ID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge it is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag of this Bridge instance Topology Change Last The time since last Topology Change occurred Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 320 Chapter 5 Monito
30. but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets NGSME16T2H User Manual 312 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment Utilization The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval in hundredths of a percent Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 313 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance RMON Alarm Overview This page provides an overview of RMON alarm entries The displayed fields are Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt gt Configuration Port Statistics Overview here arean iss Sat trom Control Incense 0 wth 20 entries per page em vg vom mesen an rea nr Indicates the index of Alarm control entry Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold Variable Indicates the particular va
31. characteristics as does port based 802 1X In Single 802 1X at most one supplicant NGSME16T2H User Manual 76 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once successfully authenticated Multi 802 1X Multi 802 1X is like Single 802 1X not an IEEE standard but a variant that features many of the same characteristics In Multi 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module In Multi 802 1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Instea
32. wns AG phones 00 03 6b Coco poran mote HOC pores 00 69 00 Pips and NEC AG phones Pregtel stones 0040 76 Poton phones 00 03 bt Core phorea Asc sen etry Sme Pmt Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Telephony OUI A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit Description The description of OUI address Normally it describes which vendor telephony device it belongs to The allowed string length is 0 to 32 Buttons Add new entry Click to add a new access management entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refreshes Refreshes the displayed the table starting from the VLAND ID input fields lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VALN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAND NGSME16T2H User Manual 173 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul QoS QoS Ingress Port Classification This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed settings are Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch 905 Ingress Port Cisssification ER
33. 100 1000Base T 2 Gigabit SFP Advanced Web Management PoE Switch that is designed to strengthen its network connections The 16 10 100 1000Base T ports support IEEE 802 3at PoE technology up to 30W per port and maximum 100m transmission distance The switch equipped with AC to DC power module to support 200W power budget for PoE The added 2 SFP slots support 100M and Gigabit Fiber transceiver for long distance transmission The Switch embedded advanced web smart software engine to support Web Management SNMP 802 1Q VLAN QoS RSTP LACP LLDP 802 1X and Access Management etc The 4K VLAN 8 physical queues 13 groups link aggregation groups are superb functionality for all applications With these features the switch is ideal for the SMB network environment to strengthen its network connection IEEE 802 3at Power over Ethernet PoE ports The switch features 16 IEEE 802 3at Power over Ethernet PoE ports supplying up to 30 watts per port This product can convert standard 100 240V AC power into low voltage DC that runs over existing LAN cable to power up IEEE 802 3at compliant network accessories It also features PoE awareness to verify whether the network device receive power is IEEE 802 3at compliant or only the data will be sent through LAN cable By adding the switch to the existing networking installing networking products such as Access Points and IP cameras can be easily managed and set up Wireless device deployments are e
34. 120 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Spanning Tree CIST Ports This page allows the user to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well This page contains settings for physical and aggregated ports Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Em Fa Por Pan Cost Pricey Admin Edge Auio Bdge hasene POU Guard POWs a PD COE toer mso The STP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Port The switch port number of the logical STP port STP Enabled Controls whether STP is enabled on this switch port Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favour of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 NGSME16T2H User Manual 121 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above operEdge state flag Operational flag describing whether the port is connecting dir
35. 200 EEE 2 Disabled 3 Disabled Port 1812 1812 1812 1812 1812 Port 1813 1813 1813 1813 1813 Port 49 49 49 NGSME16T2H User Manual 228 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI 4 5 Disabled Disabled Security gt 49 NGSME16T2H User Manual 229 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Aggregation Configuration Static Aggregation Configuration Aggregation Group Syntax Contributors Configuration Aggr Add lt port_list gt lt aggr_id gt Example Add port 5 8 to Group 1 gt aggr add 5 8 1 gt aggrdel1 Delete the group 1 Hash Code Syntax Aggr Mode smac dmaclip port enable disable smac Source MAC Address dmac Destination MAC Address ip IP Address port TCP UDP Port Number Example Only the Source MAC Hash is enabled The rest mode are disabled gt agg mode smac en gt agg mode dmac dis gt agg mode ip dis gt agg mode port dis LACP LACP Port Syntax Configuration LACP Configuration lt port_list gt LACP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable NGSME16T2H User Manual 230 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI LACP Key lt port_list gt lt key gt LACP Role lt port_list gt active passive LACP Status lt port_list gt LACP Statistics lt port_list gt clear
36. 3 Window Raw Telnet Rlogin SSH earance a Load save or delete a stored session Translation Saved Sessions Selection eas Default Settings Connection Data Proxy Telnet Rlogin SSH Seal Close window on exit Always Never Only on clean exit ned Figure 3 2 Putty Configuration gp COM3 PuTTY Figure 3 3 Putty Login Screen NGSME16T2H User Manual 21 Chapter 2 Preparing for Management Preparing for Management Preparation for Web Interface The web management page allows you to use a standard web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox to configure and interrogate the switch from anywhere on the network Before you attempt to use the web user interface to manage switch operation verify that your Switch is properly installed on your network and that every PC on this network can access the switch via the web browser 1 Verify that your network interface card NIC is operational and that your operating system supports TCP IP protocol Wire the switch power and connect your computer to the switch The switch default IP address is 192 168 2 1 The Switch and the connected PC should locate within the same IP Subnet 4 Change your computer s IP address to 192 168 2 XX or other IP address which is located in the 192 168 2 x For example IP Address 192 168 2 30 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 subnet General Connect using
37. 341 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page NGSME16T2H User Manual 342 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance LLDP EEE By using EEE power savings can be achieved at the expense of traffic latency This latency occurs due to that the circuits EEE turn off to save power need time to boot up before sending traffic over the link This time is called wakeup time To achieve minimal latency devices can use LLDP to exchange information about their respective tx and rx wakeup time as a way to agree upon the minimum wakeup time they need This page provides an overview of EEE information exchanged by LLDP Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt Configuration Men LLO Neighbors EEE Information eng Trex PV Dagrosscs gt Maianenarse LLDP Neighbors EEE Information The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted Tx Tw The link parther s maximum time that transmit path can holdoff sending data after deassertion of LPI Rx Tw The link parther s time that receiver would like the transmitter to holdoff to allow time for the receiver to wake from sleep Fallbac
38. Address is enabled Destination MAC Address The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled IP Address The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled NGSME16T2H User Manual 110 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul TCP UDP Port Number The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled Aggregation Group Configuration Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Only full duplex ports can join an aggregation and ports must be in the same speed in each group Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T
39. Authenticator attributes or unknown types are not included NGSME16T2H User Manual 304 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS Access Response Bad radiusAuthClientExtBad packets containing invalid authenticators or Authenticators Authenticators Message Authenticator attributes received from the server The number of RADIUS packets that were radiusAuthClientExtUnk Unknown Types received with unknown types from the server nownTypes on the authentication port and dropped The number of RADIUS packets that were Radius Auth Client received from the server on the Packets Dropped Ext Packets Dropped authentication port and dropped for some other reason Radius The number of RADIUS Access Request Access Requests AuthClientExtAccess packets sent to the server This does not Requests include retransmissions Access The number of RADIUS Access Request radiusAuthClientExtAcc Retransmission packets retransmitted to the RADIUS essRetransmissions s authentication server The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This Pending radiusAuthClientExtPen variable is incremented when an Requests dingRequests Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject Access Challenge timeout or retransmission The number of authenticati
40. Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received Disable No learning is done NGSME16T2H User Manual 152 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped Note Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface Static MAC Table Configuration The static entries in the MAG table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch MAC Address Table Comiguration Aging Con hgw mon Date Automate Agng BM serende MAC Table Learning Port Members Frizfstafsfefrferafeferfrfu ta ss sel est tof a8 20 172125 2a 23 26 ee MAC Address Table Configuration Aging Configuration Aging Tine 30 VOL 0005 MAC Table Leaming 0410 03 20 00 03 Aadicen slate U Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry NGSME16T2H User Manual 153 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul The MAG address of the entry Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check
41. Browse SMBStaX dat Upload State Traffic Overview QoS Statistics Browse to the location of a software image you can see the file name in the right of the Browse command Click Upload to start the process Firmware update in progress The uploaded firmware image is being transferred to flash The system will restart after the update Until then do not reset or power off the device EEATT Waiting please stand by After the software image is uploaded a page announces that the firmware update is initiated After about a minute the firmware is updated and the switch restarts Warning While the firmware is being updated Web access appears to be defunct The front LED flashes Green Off with a frequency of 10 Hz while the firmware update is in progress Do not restart or power off the device at this time or the switch may fail to function afterwards NGSME16T2H User Manual 359 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Image Select There are 2 image saved within the switch This page provides information about the active and alternate backup firmware images in the device and allows you to revert to the alternate image The web page displays two tables with information about the active and alternate firmware images Software Image Selection Image managed Version PoE standalone dev build by root virtual centos 2012 07 01T15 54 24 08 00 Date 2012 07 0
42. Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box If none of the configured authentication servers are alive the local user database is used for authentication This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to a value other than none or local Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 44 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Security Switch SSH Configuration With SSH you can remotely connect to the switch by command line interface The SSH connection can secure all the configuration commands you sent to the switch It is also known as secured Telnet console To access the switch by SSH you should install SSH client on you computer Such as PuTTy console tool In the switch side the switch acts as SSH server for user login and you can Enable or Disable SSH on this page Please check the chapter Preparation for Telnet SSH to see how to manage the switch through SSH console gt v Configuration p gt rm SSH Configuration Power Reduction v Security v Switch Save Reset Users Privilege Levels Auth Method SSH Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation Possible modes are Enable Enable SSH mode operation Disabled Disable SSH mode operation Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo
43. G S Static ARP Inspection Table Delete Port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Add new erary Sme Rea Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch 1 ARP inspection Configuration rent Treradetnactes state Port Mode Configuretion Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection NGSME16T2H User Manual 104 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch ARP Inspection Configuration ie oe Cenattos i UU Port Mode Configuration Fot Mode 1 Oasisa e 2 da at 6 Port Mode Configuration Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Translate dynamic to static Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries NGSME16T2H User Manual 105 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Static ARP Inspection Table Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch G 6 Static ARP Inspection Table B Delete Port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Save Roet Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch GG osa T rar BT MAC Address IPAddress Delete Check to de
44. If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Accounting Server and a number of columns which are The RADIUS Accounting Server number for which the configuration below applies Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Accounting Server and the switch NGSME16T2H User Manual 108 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul TACACS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each TACACS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are The TACACS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies Enable the TACACS Authentication Server by checking this box The IP address or hostname of the TACACS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation The TCP port to use on the TACACS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the
45. Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible authentication protocols are None No authentication protocol MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user uses MD5 authentication protocol SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user uses SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly Authentication Password A string identifying the authentication password phrase For MD5 authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocols are None No privacy protocol DES An optional flag to indicate that this user uses DES authentication protocol Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy password phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons Add new user Click to add a new user entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 55 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul SNMPv3 Group Configuration Configure SNMPv3 group table on thi
46. Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column NGSME16T2H User Manual 276 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Conflict Displays Conflict status of QCL entries As H W resources are shared by multiple applications It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not be available in that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releaseing the H W resources required to add QCL entry on pressing Resolve Conflict button Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch QoS Control List Status Cerrtered Auto refrenh Beaches Contri Hatrenh Kelon 1 Coriwed User OCE Frame Type Port 5 No errpies MVP vii gt Diagsossca gt Maintenance Buttons E Select the QCL status from this drop down list Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs at regular intervals Resolve Conflict Click to release the resources required to add QCL entry incase conflict status for any QCL entry is yes Refresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone NGSME16T2H User Manual 277 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Detailed Port Statisti
47. Maintenance Port The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values NGSME16T2H User Manual 285 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Port State
48. QoS Port Scheduler gt wei 1 2 130 Port 1 2 Q1 30 QoS Port Scheduler gt wei 1 2 230 Port 1 2 Q2 30 NGSME16T2H User Manual 255 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Enable Rate Unit Excess Weight Percent Enable Rate Unit 10 30 30 10 10 10 6 6 6 6 Port Shaping Syntax Port Shaper QoS Port Shaper Mode lt port_list gt enable disable QoS Port Shaper Rate lt port_list gt lt bit_rate gt Queue Shaper QoS Port QueueShaper Mode lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt enable disable QoS Port QueueShaper Rate lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt lt bit_rate gt QoS Port QueueShaper Excess lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt bit_rate gt Rate in kilo bits per second 100 3300000 Example QoS Port Shaper gt rate 1 2 1000 QoS Port QueueShaper gt mode 1 2 all en Queue Shaper QoS Port QueueShaper gt rate 1 2 all 600 Queue Shaper NGSME16T2H User Manual 256 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI DSCP Configuration Syntax QoS Port DSCP Translation lt port_list gt enable disable QoS Port DSCP Classification lt port_list gt none zero selected all QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark lt port_list gt
49. Requests 0 Serve Maltoemed Access Responses 0 Timeouts 0 Bos Auhentostors 0 Unknown Types 0 Packets Dropped o Other into State Ositted Round Trip Tine ove RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server 1 0 0 0 0 1813 apene o ats 0 Nalformed Responses D Rewanseissions 0 Bod Aurhenticsrors 0 Pending Requests 0 Unknown Types 0 Timeouts 0 Packets Dropped 0 gt Disgeossce Sue Dswd gt Maintenance Round Trip Time Ome RADIUS Authentication Statistics The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Packet Counters RADIUS authentication server packet counter There are seven receive and four transmit counters Access Accepts Access Rejects Access Challenges Malformed Access Responses radiusAuthClientExtAccess The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets Accepts valid or invalid received from the server radiusAuthClientExtAccess The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets Rejects valid or invalid received from the server The number of RADIUS Access Challenge radiusAuthClientExtAcc packets valid or invalid received from the essChallenges server The number of malformed RADIUS f Access Response packets received from radiusAuthClientExtMal ormedAccessResponse the server Malformed packets include S packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Message
50. Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and Source Specific Query messages The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last listener query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a node s initial report of interest in a multicast address The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Buttons Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VALN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAND ID gt gt Update the table staring with the entry after the last entry currently displayed NGSME16T2H User Manual 136 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul IPMC MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save The logical port for the settings The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Specify the Port and Filtering Group for the new entry Click Save Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 137 Chapter 3 Featurin
51. Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Sender IP filter is set to Network Specify the sender IP address and sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear Sender IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation Sender IP Mask When Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation Target IP Filter Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE Any No target IP filter is specified Target IP filter is don t care Host Target IP filter is set to Host Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that appears Network Target IP filter is set to Network Specify the target IP address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear Target IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation Target IP Mask When Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted decimal notation ARP SMAC Match Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any va
52. Trap Community lt community gt Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination lt ip_addr_string gt Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination lt ipv6_addr gt Example Security Switch SNMP Trap gt mode ena Security Switch SNMP Trap gt version 2c Security Switch SNMP Trap gt community public Security Switch SNMP Trap gt destination 192 168 2 100 Result Trap Mode Enabled Trap Version 2c Trap Community public Trap Destination 192 168 2 100 Trap IPv6 Destination SNMP Trap Event Setting Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure NGSME16T2H User Manual 215 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI enable disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Link up enable disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode enable disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout lt timeout gt Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times lt retries gt Example Security Switch SNMP gt trap auth fai en Security Switch SNMP gt trap link up en Security Switch SNMP gt trap info mode en Security Switch SNMP gt trap info time 5 Security Switch SNMP gt trap info ret times 5 Result Trap Authentication Failure Enabled Trap Link up and Link down Enabled Trap Inform Mode Enabled Trap Inform Timeout seconds 5 Trap Inform Retry Times 5 SNMPv3 User Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Add lt engineid gt lt user name gt MD5 SHA lt auth password
53. a1 Auto Aana E 22 Aso Ace FY z fume Tel 24 auc la Aare m 25 Auto Arra 28 Aiso u Acna 9 NGSME16T2H User Manual 112 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Autosetting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot Role The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets each second while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 113 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Loop Protection This page allows the user to inspect the current Loop Protection configurations and possibly change them as well The loop protection feature is very important to protect the unexpected network loop especially when you install the switch on the internet The incorrect installation failure media or hacker attacking may create network loop The switch supports the Loop Protection feature the port can be shutdown or log information per your configurat
54. are decoded All other TLVs are discarded Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbors table as shown below CDP TLV Device ID is mapped to the LLDP Chassis ID field CDP TLV Address is mapped to the LLDP Management Address field The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbors table NGSME16T2H User Manual 139 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul CDP TLV Port ID is mapped to the LLDP Port ID field CDP TLV Version and Platform is mapped to the LLDP System Description field Both the CDP and LLDP support system capabilities but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP These capabilities are shown as others in the LLDP neighbors table If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbor devices If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch Note When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn t removed immediately but gets removed when the hold time is exceeded Port Descr Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Name Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Descr Optiona
55. closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 Time zone Offset Provide the time zone offset relative to UTC GMT The offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range is from 720 to 720 minutes Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 27 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Configuration Configure the switch managed IP information on this page Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch s IP Configuration IP ONS Proxy Configuration Pont The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration DHCP Client Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation IP Mask Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation IP Router Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation NTPProvide the IP address of the NTP Server in dotted decimal no
56. configuration webpage allows you to set system variables or monitor system status The following section will guide you to set the IP address properly in a Microsoft Windows 8 environment Setting IP address in other Microsoft operating system such as Windows Vista or Windows 7 is quite the same and can be related 1 Open Network and Sharing Center in Control Panel and click on Change adapter settings as shown in the figure down below 4 3S Network and Network and Sharing Center v Search Control Panel View your basic network information and set up connections Control Panel Home Change adapter settings Change advanced sharing Network settings Private network View your active networks Access type Internet HomeGroup Available to join Connections Ethernet Change your networking settings T Set up a new connection or network Set up a broadband dial up or VPN connection or set up a router or access See also point HomeGroup Troubleshoot problems Internet Options k bra Diagnose and repair network problems or get troubleshooting information Windows Firewall 2 ANetwork Connections window will pop up showing all the network connections available on your PC Please double click on the network connection you are using to connect to the Web Smart PoE Switch T un Net Networ v Search Network C Organize v Bluetooth Network Connection A ha Ethernet Not connected n Ne
57. default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD SFM Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD SFM Information Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MLD SFM Information Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over MLD SFM Information Table Columns VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Group Group address of the group displayed Port Switch port number NGSME16T2H User Manual 333 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the pa
58. e a how Retesh gt Diagrestics gt Moiemenance Aggr ID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner Partner Key The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID Last changed The time since this aggregation changed Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 316 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance LACP Port Status This page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Ge LAGP Status wonten Gs st S285 Nag z FAR AAKRE AEA AA BXL Port The switch port number LACP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves Meanwhile it s LACP status is disabled Key The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together Aggr ID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group Partner System ID The partner s Syst
59. fragment 0 1 any ICMP keyword ICMP type number 0 255 or any ICMP code number 0 255 or any UDP keyword Source UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or Destination UDP TCP port range 0 65535 TCP keyword TCP flags fin syn rst psh ack urg 0 1 any Permit forwarding default Deny forwarding Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable Port list for copy of frames or disable Mirror of frames enable disable System logging of frames log log disable Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable Security Network ACL gt add 2 port 6 10 policy 3 8 ip NGSME16T2H User Manual 223 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI ACE ID 2 added last Edit one ACE Security Network ACL gt add 1 port 1 5 policy 2 8 any ACE ID 1 modified last Result ID Type Port Policy Frame Action Rate L PortC Mirror Counter 1 User 1 5 2 0x8 Any Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 2 User 6 10 3 0x8 IP Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 DHCP DHCP Snooping Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode enable disable Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode lt port_list gt trusted untrusted Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics lt port_list gt clear Example Security Network gt dhcp snooping mode en Security Network gt dhcp snooping port mode 1 tru Port 1 Security Network gt dhcp snooping port mode 1 10 tru Port 1 10 DHCP Relay Syntax
60. gt DES lt priv password gt Example Security Switch SNMP gt user add 800007e5017f000001 orwell Security Switch SNMP gt user add 800007e5017f000001 andy md5 andy123 Result SNMPv3 Users Table Idx Engine ID User Name Level Auth Priv NGSME16T2H User Manual 216 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI 1 Local default_user NoAuth NoPriv None None 2 Local orwell NoAuth NoPriv None None 3 Local andy Auth NoPriv MD5 None Number of entries 3 RMON In Security Switch Group the system supports 4 types RMON groups please follow the RMON Syntax to add the entries Syntax Security Switch gt rmon Statistics Security Switch RMON Statistics Add lt stats_id gt lt data_source gt Security Switch RMON Statistics Delete lt stats_id gt Security Switch RMON Statistics Lookup lt stats_id gt Histroy Security Switch RMON History Add lt history_id gt lt data_source gt lt interval gt lt buckets gt Security Switch RMON History Delete lt history_id gt Security Switch RMON History Lookup lt history_id gt Alarm Security Switch RMON Alarm Add lt alarm id gt lt interval gt lt alarm_vairable gt absolute delta lt rising_threshold gt lt rising_event_index gt lt falling_threshold gt lt falling event index gt rising falling both Security Switch RMON Alarm Delete lt alarm id gt Security Switch RMON Alarm Lookup lt alarm
61. gt msti pri MSTI Bridge Priority CIST 32768 STP gt msti pri 4096 The available priority parameter includes 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Forward Delay Syntax STP FwdDelay lt delay gt Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Max Age Syntax STP MaxAge lt max_age gt NGSME16T2H User Manual 233 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds and MaxAge must be lt FwdDelay 1 2 Maximum Hop Count Syntax STP MaxHops lt maxhops gt Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops Transmit Hold Count Syntax STP Txhold lt holdcount gt Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second Advanced Setting Syntax STP bpduFilter enable disable STP bpduGuard enable disable STP recovery lt timeout gt After recovery timeout time is set the recovery is enabled automatically MSTI Mapping MSTI VLAN Mapping Syntax STP Msti Add lt msti gt lt vid range gt Example STP gt mst add 1 100 Add VLAN 100 to MSTI1 STP gt mst map MSTI VLANs mapped to MSTI MSTI1 100 MSTI2 No VLANs mapped MSTI3 No VLANs mapped MSTI4 No VLANs mapped MSTI5 No VLANs mapped NGSME16T2H User Manual 234 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CL
62. incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 0xFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames SMAC Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address i e first three octet byte of MAC address DMAC Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame Possible values are Any All types of Destination MAG addresses are allowed Unicast Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed NGSME16T2H User Manual 186 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Multicast Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed Broadcast Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowedd The default value is Any VID Indicates VLAN ID either a specific VID or range of VIDs VID can be in the range 1 4095 or Any PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any Conflict Displays QCE status It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not available in that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the resource requir
63. is that the IGMP is applied to IPv4 Multicast stream the MLD is applied to IPv6 Multicast stream While configuring the MLD Snooping configuration the only thing you need to understand is the IPv6 packet format Basic Configuration This basic configuration of the MLD IPv6 Multicast Routing Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Snooping Enabled Enable the Global MLD Snooping Unregistered IPMCv6 Flooding enabled Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding Please note that disabling unregistered IPMCv 6 traffic flooding may lead to failure of Neighbor Discovery SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range Leave Proxy Enabled Enable MLD Leave Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side Proxy Enabled Enable MLD Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier Normally the router port is the uplink port to the upper L3 Router or IGMP Querier For example in below figure the green port of the 2 switches are Router port Source Router Switch Switch Recei
64. octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to The string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed The SNMPv3 architecture uses the User based Security Model USM for message security and the View based Access Control Model VACM for access control For the USM entry the usm User Engine ID and usm User Name are the entry s keys In a simple agent usm User Engine ID is always that agent s own snmp Engine ID value The value can also take the value of the snmp Engine ID of a remote SNMP engine with which this user can communicate In other words if user engine ID equal system engine ID then it is local user otherwise it s remote user User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means it must first be ensured that the value is set correctly NGSME16T2H User Manual 54 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Authentication Protocol
65. of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box as v To include a port in a forbidden port list check the box as shown To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and for every new VLAN entry all boxes are unchecked Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Adding a New VLAN Click to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled when you click on Save A VLAN without any port members will be deleted when you click Save NGSME16T2H User Manual 156 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt 2 VLAN Membership Configuration Rete j lt gt gt Stat Fon VLAN wan 70 tries pet page D GE 1 seme kb aa ae iD A mer o OOMOOI00 nonnnITIBOTOO CA RE Sme Forset The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANS Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refreshes Refreshes the displayed the table starting from the VLAND ID input fields lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VALN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAND ID gt gt Upd
66. or 30 Watts In this mode the Maximum Power fields have no effect 3 LLDP MED mode This mode is similar to the Class mode expect that each port determine the amount power it reserves by exchanging PoE information using the LLDP protocol and reserves power accordingly If no LLDP information is available for a port the port will reserve power using the class mode In this mode the Maximum Power fields have no effect For all modes If a port uses more power than the reserved power for the port the port is shut down NGSME16T2H User Manual 149 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Power Management Mode There are 2 modes for configuring when to shut down the ports 1 Actual Consumption In this mode the ports are shut down when the actual power consumption for all ports exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver or if the actual power consumption for a given port exceeds the reserved power for that port The ports are shut down according to the ports priority If two ports have the same priority the port with the highest port number is shut down 2 Reserved Power In this mode the ports are shut down when total reserved powered exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver In this mode the port power is not turned on if the PD requests more power than available from the power supply PoE Power Supply Configuration Primary Power Supply W Some switc
67. protocol InUnknownProtos The number of the inbound packets that were discarded because of the unknown or un support protocol OutOctets The number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters OutUcastPkts The number of uni cast packets that request to transmit NGSME16T2H User Manual 63 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul OutNUcastPkts The number of broad cast and multi cast packets that request to transmit OutDiscards The number of outbound packets that are discarded event the packets is normal OutErrors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors OutQlen The length of the output packet queue in packets Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch i RMON Alarm Configuration Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are Absolute Get the sample directly Delta Calculate the difference between samples default Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period Startup Alarm The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are Rising Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold Falling Trigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold RisingOrFalling Trigge
68. range of IP address and disable some remote management service such HTTP HTTPS SNMP Telnet and SSH This feature is important while user installed the switch on network After enabled the Access Management only the pre configured IP address or a range of IP address can access the switch management interface and only the available service can be accessed Configure access management table on this page The maximum entry number is 16 If the application s type match any one of the access management entries it will allow access to the switch Example of the below figure only the IP Addresses range from 192 168 2 101 to 192 168 2 200 can access the switch s management interface The available services are HTTP HTTPS SNMP Telnet and SSH If there is one IP address 192 168 2 201 try to open the web management interface it is not allowed Access Management Configuration Mode Enabled v Delete Start IP Address End IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH 192 168 2 101 192 168 2 200 7 7 7 Add New Entry Reset Mode Indicates the access management mode operation Possible modes are Enable Enable access management mode operation Disabled Disable access management mode operation Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Start IP address Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry End IP address Indicates the end IP address for the access man
69. received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets Rx and Tx Pause A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation NGSME16T2H User Manual 278 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue Receive Error Counters The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors The number of short 1 frames received with valid CRC The number of long 2 frames received with valid CRC The number of short 1 frames received with invalid CRC The number of long 2 frames received with invalid CRC The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Note 1 Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Note 2 Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port Transmit Error Counters The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions N
70. received with the Remote ID option missing Receive Bad Circuit ID The number of packets whose Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID Receive Bad Remote ID The number of packets whose Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID Client Statistics Transmit to Client The number of relayed packets from server to client Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in error while being sent to servers NGSME16T2H User Manual 297 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Receive from Client The number of received packets from server Receive Agent Option The number of received packets with relay agent information option Replace Agent Option The number of packets which were replaced with relay agent information option Keep Agent Option The number of packets whose relay agent information was retained Drop Agent Option The number of packets that were dropped which were received with relay agent information Buttons Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears statistics Network Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this page The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address Navigating the ARP Inspec
71. refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Updates the system log entries starting from the current entry ID Clear Flushes all system log entries lt lt Updates the system log entries starting from the first available entry ID lt lt Updates the system log entries ending at the last entry currently displayed gt gt Updates the system log entries starting from the last entry currently displayed gt gt Updates the system log entries ending at the last available entry ID NGSME16T2H User Manual 272 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Port State Port State This page provides an overview of the current switch port states Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt Configuration The port states are illustrated as follows RJ45 ports 3 jem SFP ports EI a Ej State Disabled Down Link Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone NGSME16T2H User Manual 273 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Traffic Overview This page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports The displayed counters are Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Configurati Eiin on Port Statistics Overview Auto tutvenh Aebes Gem ac B aecco
72. rerrnsrnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnonnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnerrnnnrrrrnnnnnnenerrnnnnnn 46 Security Switch Access Management Configuration srrrnnnnnnnnonnnnnvrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnne 47 Security Switch SNMP oo ose cat ciecceteeiea net oes eaarmtan inns eetierteantual dans entcetenasielatnenedeae 49 RMON Statistics Configuration 0 ccccccec cece etree eee eeeee eee etree eenccaaeeeeeeeeeeteeseaaaeeeeeees 60 Security Network LQ Kusnosugegsmusmmnnunumnnmmnvaaupdsenanunmidenu nd mv 67 Port Security Limit Control Configuration ssnnrrnnnnnnnnonnnnnvrrrrnnnnnnnonnnnnvrrrnnnnnnenernnnnnrrnnnnne 67 NGSME16T2H User Manual 3 Table of Contents Security Network Network Access Server Configuration rrrnnnnnnnonnnnnvrrrrnnnrnnnerrnnnnnn 71 Security Network Access Control List Configuration rrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnvrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnn 82 Switch Network DHCP Configuration rernnssnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnonnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnenrnnnnrrrnnnnenenernnnnnnn 99 IP Source Guard Configuration srrrnnnnnnnnornnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrrnnnnnnsnnnrnnnnnrnnnnne 102 ARP NS 104 Security AAA Authentication Server Configuration wrrrrrrrnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnn 107 Aggregation Configuration rrrrrrrnnvrrrrnnnnnanonnnnnvrrrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrrnnnnnenenennnnnnnrnnnenensnennnnnnnrnnnnne 110 Stallc Aggregalon Va4av4v vveaesamensastsemmmmtendsnmtenmisjudneisndsjune 110
73. selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 191 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul UPnP Configuration Configure UPnP on this page PoE GigaBit Ethernet Switch Loop Protection J i gt Spanning Tree UPnP Configuration MVR gt LLDP 1 POE 4 MAC Table Advertising Duration 100 gt VLANs gt Private VLAN r G gt TH e gt Save Reset v Voice VLAN Configuration gt IPMC Mode Enabled Port Policing Port Scheduler Port Shaping Moes QoS Control List Storm Control Mirroring UPnP sFlow Mode Indicates the UPnP operation mode Possible modes are Enabled Enable UPnP mode operation Disabled Disable UPnP mode operation When the mode is enabled two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related packets to CPU The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled TTL The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 Advertising Duration The duration carried in SSDP packets is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or they should receive an SSDP advertisement message from this switch If a control point does not receive any message within the durati
74. stave v2 ven Mode Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are Enable Enable SNMP mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation Version Indicates the SNMP supported version Possible versions are SNMPv1 Set SNMP supported version 1 SNMPv2c Set SNMP supported version 2c SNMPv3 Set SNMP supported version 3 Read Community Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet NGSME16T2H User Manual 49 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Write Community Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a S
75. switch such as Reset Factory Default Firmware upgrading Configuration Save Restore and Restart the device Restart Device You can restart the switch on this page After restart the switch will boot normally Restart Device Are you sure you want to perform a Restart LYes No Yes Click to restart device No Click to return to the Port State page without restarting Factory Defaults You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained The new configuration is available immediately which means that no restart is necessary Factory Defaults Are you sure you want to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults Yes No Yes Click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults No Click to return to the Port State page without resetting the configuration Note Restoring factory default can also be performed by making a physical loopback between port 1 and port 2 within the first minute from switch reboot In the first minute after boot loopback packets will be transmitted at port 1 If a loopback packet is received at port 2 the switch will do a restore to default NGSME16T2H User Manual 358 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Software Upload Firmware Update This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch gt Configuration v ake Firmware Update gt System v Ports
76. take adequate measures NGSME16T2H User Manual 2 Table of Contents Table of Contents Before Starting ece eee EE REENE EE A AREE OTEA EAEE E NE A ENERE ETNEA NEERA 8 Intended Red Rase 9 Icons for Note Caution and Warning cccccccccccccccccee cece cece rere rere ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 Product Package Contents rnrrrnnnnnnnonnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnenrnnnnnrrnnnnenenenrnnnnrrrnnnnnnesenrnnnnnn 10 Chapter 1 Product Overview oisicisisictssesscoisicciepescesavetencrseoesiaeaseietenurecammeaeudaieounwee eeeneelaaaeeneeamenuees 11 Product Brief DesenlpHohLavv24422geesaenn eee eet 12 Product Specification Lus4arsssvmresrme keen dues oenciepeacibeasarensaienes teaseaneneienmbateteee 14 Hardware Description a icissiccce cect cic dseceectteeen ase dsc sect et aca dinate ace dinmeideaclecedinmeteeareecteins 17 Hardware Installation 2 seso ssmseessisnssieeuinerndeoansnanivanhentjaruin evening 18 Chapter 2 Preparing for Management rasannnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnenennnnnrnnnnnenenerrnnnnrrrnnnnensnenn 19 Preparation for Serial Console rrrrrrrnrnnnvrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvrrnnnnnnnnnennnnnrrrnnnnnennnrnnnnnrrrnnnenessrnrnnnnnn 20 Preparation for Web Interface rrnnnnnanonnnnnrrnnnnnnnnonvnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnrnnnnnenenenrnnnnrrrnnnnnnenenrnnnnnn 22 Preparation for Telnet SSH Interface rrnnnnnnnnnnnnoornnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnernnnnnrrnnnnnnnserrnnnn
77. tectics Delete Group Name Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name dekaat 10 a amy Notat NOPi drat vene one aj delast A POP am Nat NoPyiv delast ven sefa v Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Contqur ron a SNMPV3 Access Configuration ET am Nok None etaan vene vors Seimi wow i tease wora et ne TT ner Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are Any Any security model accepted v1 v2c usm V1 Reserved for SNMPv1 V2c Reserved for SNMPv2c Usm User based Security Model USM Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy NGSME16T2H User Manual 58 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Read View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters
78. that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media This NGSME16T2H User Manual 146 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy 5 Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance 6 Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services 7 Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signalling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signalling than for the video media This application type should not be advertis
79. the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transit Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds and MaxAge must be lt FwdDelay 1 2 Maximum Hop Count This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information to Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops Transmit Hold Count The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second NGSME16T2H User Manual 117 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Advanced Settings This section descript the advanced settings of the Spanning Tree Protocol Edge Port BPDU Filtering Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs Edge Port BPDU Guard Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error d
80. the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed NGSME16T2H User Manual 348 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance VLAN Membership Status This page provides an overview of membership status of VLAN users Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch VLAN Membership Status for Combined users Sart rom VLAN 1 wih 20 enes per page ike 12 3 5 6 8 9 toper ta 13 t4 fra 6 17 fa ea ae 21 aa aa ae 25 ae mite Se er he ahr ee ee VLAN USER VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configurations such as PVID and UVID Currently we support the following VLAN user types CLI Web SNMP These are referred to as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server MVRP Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol MVRP allows dynamic registration and deregistration of VLANs on ports on a VLAN bridged network Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN MSTP The 802 1s Mult
81. through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 Adding a new policy Click to add a new policy Specify the Application type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority and DSCP for the new policy Click Save Port Policies Configuration Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration Port The port number to which the configuration applies Policy Id The set of policies that shall apply to a given port The set of policies is selected by check marking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 148 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul PoE Configuration The function is applied to the PoE Switch model If your switch is not PoE switch you will not see this configuration commands This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current port settings PoE GigaBit Ethernet Switch v Configuration gt System Power Over Ethernet Configuration gt Power Reduction Ports Reserved Power determined by Class Allocation LLDP MED
82. to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports NGSME16T2H User Manual 125 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Managed Gigalit Ethernet Switch gt MVR Mode Enable Disable the Global MVR VLAN ID Specify the Multicast VLAN ID Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch gt Mode Enable MVR on the port Type Specify the MVR port type on the port Immediate Leave Enable the fast leave on the port Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 126 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul IPMC IP Multicast IPMC is short of IP Multicast the switch support IPv4 and IPv6 multicast forwarding and filtering The IGMP Snooping defines how to manage IPv4 multicast traffic the MLD defines how to manage IPv6 multicast traffic IGMP Snooping Configuration Internet Group Management Protocol Snooping IGMP Snooping is a multicast constraining mechanism that runs on Layer 2 devices to manage and control multicast groups By listening to and analyzing IGMP messages a Layer 2 device running IGMP Snooping establishes mappings between ports and multicast MAC addresses and forwards multicast data based on these mappings Basic
83. undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 131 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Port The logical port for the settings Filtering Groups The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered Adding New Filtering Group Click to add a new entry to the Group amp Gi 19216821 H RER tom Filtering table Specify the Port and The value of Group IPv4 Address must be a valid IP Filtering Group of the new entry Click address in dotted decimal notation xy z w The following restrictions apply Save 1 x must be a decimal number between 224 and 239 2 y z and w must be decimal numbers between 0 and 255 Warning message about the Filtering Group The range of the IP Multicast is 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 132 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul MLD Snooping Configuration This section provides MLD Snooping related configuration The MLD is for IPv6 Multicast Snooping The difference between the 2 IGMP and MLD
84. up to 9 Groups Spanning Tree Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol and legacy STP Loop Protection Loop protection to avoid network loop IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping V1 V2 IGMP Query LLDP IEEE 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol MAC Address Table Ageing Time Static Secure MAC Table VLAN IEEE 802 1Q VLAN up to 4K groups Private VLAN Private VLAN and Port Isolation QoS 8 Priority Queue Strict amp WRR scheduler Syslog System log server mode Diagnostic Cable Diagnostic Ping Mirroing Maintenance Firmware Upgrade Configuration Backup and Restore Reload Default Warm Reboot LEDs Indicators Per Port PoE On Amber PD is connected Per Port Link Act On Slow Blinking Green Ethernet Port is connected Quick Blinking Green Data Transmitting Receiving System On Power On Amber Power Input 100 240VAC Power Consumption PoE max 200W System 15W Dimension H W D 44 330 220mm Weight 2 2 kg Operating Temperature 0 40 NGSME16T2H User Manual 15 Chapter 1 Product Overview Product Overview Humidity 5 90 non condensing Certification CE FCC Class A Safety UL UL60950 1 CE IEC60950 1 NGSME16T2H User Manual 16 Chapter 1 Product Overview Product Overview Hardware Description This section mainly describes the hardware of Full L2 Management Network Switch and gives a physical and functional overview on the certain switch Front Panel The f
85. when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access Port based 802 1X In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and NGSME16T2H User Manual 75 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 CHALLENGE PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indi
86. 1 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard Down 2 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard 1Gfdx 3 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard Down Status of Link UP ports poeswitch Port gt conf all up Port Configuration Port State Mode Flow Control MaxFrame Power Excessive Link 2 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard 1Gfdx Port Statistic poeswitch Port gt statistic 1 Port 1 Statistics Rx Packets 0 Tx Packets 0 Rx Octets 0 Tx Octets 0 Rx Unicast 0 Tx Unicast 0 NGSME16T2H User Manual 209 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Security Configuration Security Switch Configuration Security Switch Group gt securi swi Type up to move up one level or to go to root level Security Switch gt Command Groups Security Switch Users User management Security Switch Privilege Privilege level Security Switch Auth Authentication Security Switch SSH Secure Shell Security Switch HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer Security Switch Access Access management Security Switch SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Security Switch RMON Remote Network Monitoring User Configuration Security Switch gt user Available Commands Security Switch Users Configuration Security Switch Users Add lt user_name gt lt password gt lt privilege_level gt Security Switch Users Delete lt user_nam
87. 10 5 10 Debug 15 15 15 15 Diagnostics 5 10 5 10 Authentication Syntax Method Security Switch Auth Method console telnet ssh web none local radius tacacs enable disable Example Configure Telnet Authentication method to Radius Enable Security Switch gt auth method telnet radius en Authentication Security Switch gt auth conf Configuration Auth Configuration Client Authentication Method Local Authentication Fallback console local Disabled telnet local Disabled ssh local Disabled web local Disabled NGSME16T2H User Manual 212 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI SSH Syntax Security Switch SSH Mode enable disable Example Security Switch gt ssh mode en Security Switch gt ssh mode dis HTTPS Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Mode enable disable Security Switch gt https mode en Security Switch gt https mode dis Security Switch HTTPS Redirect enable disable Security Switch gt https mode en Must enabled HTTPS Security Switch gt https redi en Result Security Switch gt https conf HTTPS Configuration HTTPS Mode Enabled HTTPS Redirect Mode Enabled Access Management Syntax Security Switch Access Add lt access id gt lt start ip addr gt lt end ip addr gt web snmp telnet Example Limit the IP range from the 192 168 2 1 to NGSME16T2H User Manual 213 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configur
88. 133 Basic ConilguraUlonuv77 47724 lt q4 lt 4q42 4 arsassesjenaseasmeisugsenmujennkenesvudngdtnueian 133 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration rrrsrsrnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnennnnnnrrrnnnnenenennnnnnrrnnnnne 135 IPMC MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering srrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnrnnnnne 137 LLDP Parameters eee 138 LLDP COntl urate ii ic coiasiccsandebiconcesulazandss mqerdzulnenceshmseneie a ENEE TEE EEA ETETEA NERAKA EEEE NER ETENEE 138 LLDP Media CoC EY ccc ccc ede cece ed acere denen peli vsa ie a tein Selly ape eerie ate 141 SE ET 149 MAC Address Table Configuration srrssnrrrnnnnnnnnonnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrrrrnnnenenerrnnnnrrrnnnnnnenrrrnnnnnn 152 VLAN Virt al EAN Lsss4vs4am smekke 155 VLAN Membership Configuration eerrrrrrnnnrrrrrnnnnnnonrnnnnnrrrnnnennnonnnnnnnrrnnnnnnenerrnnnnrrnnnnnensnnnn 155 VLAN Port Configuration ssrssnnnrrrnnnnnnnnonnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrrnnnnnnennnnnnnnnrrnnnenensnrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnntnnn 158 Private VLANS see 160 Private VLAN Membership Configuration cc cceceeeeee eee eeeeeenee eee eter teeeeaaeeeeeeeee tte 160 Port Isolation Configuration 3iis3s2schiv cin ei so schescds Flew disco lees lee 162 NGSME16T2H User Manual 4 Table of Contents VL Ne 163 VCL MAC Based VLAN Configuration rnrrrnnnnnnnnonnnnnvrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnrrnrnnnrrrnnnnnenennn 163 VCL Protocol b sed VLAN 2 Q osonmmssaemntesea
89. 1T15 54 24 08 00 Image managed bk Version SMBStaxX standalone dev build by uwai Uwai Fedora 2012 11 06116 35 36 08 00 Config config mk Date 2012 11 06T16 35 36 08 00 Activate Alternate Image Cancel Note 1 In case the active firmware image is the alternate image only the Active Image table is shown In this case theActivate Alternate Image button is also disabled 2 If the alternate image is active due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual intervention uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and activate this 3 The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases This does not constitute an error Image Information Image The flash index name of the firmware image The name of primary preferred image is image the alternate image is named image bk Version The version of the firmware image Date The date where the firmware was produced Buttons Activate Alternate Image Click to use the alternate image This button may be disabled depending on system state Cancel Cancel activating the backup image Navigates away from this page NGSME16T2H User Manual 360 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Configuration You can save view or load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags Header tags lt xml vers
90. 2 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled Buttons Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately NGSME16T2H User Manual 303 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance RADIUS Authentication Statistics This page provides detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt amp f RADIUS Authentication Statistics for Server 1 0 0 0 0 1812 Sarna Ta Aano rwirech Fure Ca Receive Packets Transmit Packets EI Access Accepts O Actes Requests U Saree 0 Access Rejects 0 Access Retransmissions 0 Sena s Ansess Challenges D Pending
91. 2H User Manual 111 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul LACP Dynamic Aggregation This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch G G 5 LAC Port Configuration er eee Em Te 1 te gt Ane os ute p fine m Awe m m ne m 4 aso a Active aso Awe lt Ate Ane Ate gt Acne e awe a fete x ate a fete m Aiso Aane aso hane 2 Ate e Acne a A sane e u ano a aane m w ano la sne x aso lm Adve 7 Auto j Ane 2j 3 Aat ine anb la tee x 2 aso a tane 2 aso E Pane w 22 Aude m Acne m Oot ine o gt 24 aso lm kome 7 2 mate le Acne Ate Acne l Port The switch port number LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2 GLAGs per stack Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch t gt 3 LACP Port Configuration Port LAGP Enaid 1 uio hara Paa presto 4 Auto tere e au utro 6 Auto l Aana Aum Aara G Au An Aat x ave el w Aiso l Aona Auto l Aana 12 Aiso er 1 Aso Active Ie u au x hane 7 1 FY z re m w Auto p borra Aso E Aora 8 1 EY iane le w ue zl tme e 20 aso lE Aore 7
92. 3z 1000Base SX LX IEEE 802 3x Full duplex and Flow Control IEEE 802 3az EEE Energy Efficient Ethernet IEEE 802 3at PoE Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol IEEE 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1p Class of Service Priority Protocols IEEE 802 1X Port based Network Access Control Interface Number of Port 18 All Ethernet Port are on the Rear 10 100 1000Base RJ 45 Port 16 Auto negotiation Auto MDI MDIX 100 1000Base X SFP 2 Performance Switch Fabric 36Gbps MAC Address Table Size 8K Forwarding Rate 26 7Mpps Packet Buffer 4Mb PoE Features 802 3af at Compliant Max Power Output Per Port 30W PoE Power Budge 200W PoE Management Per Port Enable Disable Priority Setting Maximum Power PoE Mode Setting Per System Maximum Power PD Classification PoE Status L2 Features Management Interface Web Browser SNMP v1 v2c v3 IP Configuration IP Setting DHCP Client NTP NGSME16T2H User Manual 14 Chapter 1 Product Overview Product Overview EEE EEE Configuration for power reduction Port Configuration Auto Negotiation Port Speed Duplex control Flow Control Jumbo Frame Enable Disable Power Control Switch Security System Password Access Management HTTPS IEEE 802 1x NAS Port based access control Link Aggregation Static amp LACP
93. 5 System Log Server Mode Syntax System Log Server Mode enable disable Example poeswitch System gt log server mode en Server Address Syntax System Log Server Address lt ip_addr_string gt Example poeswitch System gt log server add 192 168 2 100 Syslog Level Syntax System Log Level info warninglerror Information poeswitch System gt log level inf Warning poeswitch System gt log level war Error poeswitch System gt log level err Clear Syslog Syntax System Log Clear all info warning error poeswitch Systemslog clear all NGSME16T2H User Manual 203 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI System Log poeswitch System gt log conf Configuration System Log Configuration System Log Server Mode Enabled System Log Server Address 192 168 2 100 System Log Level Error NGSME16T2H User Manual 204 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Power Reduction Feature Command Line LED Power Reduction LED Intensity Times Syntax led power timers lt hour gt lt intensity gt Parameters lt hour gt The hour 0 24 at which to change LEDs intensity lt intensity gt The LED intensity in 0 100 Example Time 2 00 Intensity 30 led power gt timer 2 30 Maintenance Syntax led_power maintenance lt maintenance_time gt on_at_errors leave_at_errors Parameters lt m
94. 55 255 0 192 168 2 254 1 NTP Enable NTP Mode by below command poeswitch IP gt ntp mode en Type the NTP Server address settings by below command Syntax IP NTP Server Add lt server_index gt lt ip_addr_string gt IP NTP Server Ipv6 Add lt server_index gt lt server_ipv6 gt IP NTP Server Delete lt server_index gt Example poeswitch IP gt ntp ser add 1 192 168 100 1 poeswitch IP gt ntp ser add 2 168 95 1 1 Check the NTP Server settings by below command poeswitch IP gt ntp conf IP NTP Configuration NTP Mode Enabled Idx Server IP host address a b c d or a host name string 1 192 168 100 1 168 95 1 1 DNS Server NGSME16T2H User Manual 200 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI IP DNS lt ip addr gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address Example poeswitch IP gt dns 168 95 1 1 DNS Proxy Syntax IP DNS Proxy enable disable poeswitch IP gt dns_proxy en IPv6 Configuration IPv6 Commands Syntax IP IPv6 AUTOCONFIG enable disable IP IPv6 Setup lt ipv6_addr gt lt ipv6_prefix gt lt ipv6_router gt IP IPv6 State lt ipv6_addr gt enable disable IP IPv6 Ping6 lt ipv6_addr gt Length lt ping_length gt Count lt ping_count gt Interval lt ping_interval gt Auto Configuration Syntax IP IPv6 AUTOCONFIG enable disable Example poeswitc
95. AC Based VLAN Status aoorrnnnnnnnonnrnnnnrrrnnnnnnnonrnnnnrrnnnnnnenenrnnnrrrnnnnnnenerrnnnnrrnnnnnnnstenn 353 SFO sers ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee 354 BONING SG ceca eg nse S 355 PUG EE E E E R E ENEE E eee ee ee 355 PINGOS eaa ee ee ee ene en ee re ee ee rere eee ae 356 VeriPHY Cable Diagnostic cece eee teen e eee e eee eet eeaaaeee sees ee eeteaaaaeeeeeeeeeeteecnaaeeeeeeees 357 MAMENINGE Lend 358 Restart Device iin cismietihnncineidenwb nude itera Mime meee 358 Factory PEEL ai ee i eo ea ede Pe ee 358 Software UBIO 40 asset ese eer ear 359 PMR WOW AES AN 2 aent 359 Made See vea AEAEE RETEA NEEE A E 360 Go gs e 9 Hareueeen Mee mee neces ent ener nee Tener ore eee eee ene ree een ee ee ae 361 Appendix A Product Safety vusnesessseensssmessnstqmiarienimnjesnvisjuiedtnsspanneinier 363 Appendix B IP Configuration for Your PC 000000 eee ee eeene eee eeeraeeeeenenaeeeeeeenaeeeeenenaes 364 NGSME16T2H User Manual 7 Before Starting In Before Starting This section contains introductory information which includes Intended Readers Icons for Note Caution and Warning Product Package Contents NGSME16T2H User Manual 8 Before Starting Intended Readers This manual provides information regarding to all the aspects and functions needed to install configure use and maintain the product you ve purchased This manual is intended for technicians who are familiar with in depth concepts of network
96. Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Click to refresh the page Any changes made locally will be undone Clear Click to clear the counter NGSME16T2H User Manual 83 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul ACL Rate Limiters Configuration Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Ge 3 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Rate Limiter O Rate Unit 1 1 p rm le ja pen le ps is res pos ps ie 1 e wv 1 ops 1 1 pos le 12 1 ple 8 1 me 1 ppm 1 1 pee i w 1 pen be a Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row Rate The allowed values are 0 3276700 in pps Or 0 100 200 300 1000000 in kbps Unit Specify the rate unit The allowed values are pps packets per second kbps Kbits per second Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 84 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Access Control List Configuration This page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Click on the lowest plus
97. Configuration This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Port Router Port Fast Leave Throng deve ener Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding enabled Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding Unregistered IPMCv4 traffic is so called unknown multicast After selected the unregistered multicast stream will be forwarded like normal packets Once you un selected it such stream will be discarded NGSME16T2H User Manual 127 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul IGMP SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range Leave Proxy Enabled Enable IGMP Leave Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side Proxy Enabled Enable IGMP Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Port Related Configuration Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier Normally the router port is the uplink port to the upper L3 Router or IGMP Querier For example in below figure the green port of the 2 switches are Router port Source Router Switch Sw
98. EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled NGSME16T2H User Manual 80 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Port State The current state of the port It can undertake one of the following values Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled Link Down NAS is globally enabled but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients are authorized and Y are unauthorized Restart Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled an
99. Ethernet Switch ee meee Port The port number for which the configuration below applies Enabled Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port Rate Controls the rate for the policer The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps or fps and it is restricted to 1 3300 when the Unit is Mbps or kfps Unit Controls the unit of measure for the policer rate as kbps Mbps fps or kfps The default value is kbps Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 176 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul QoS Port Scheduler This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed settings are Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt Ap ozten QoS Egress Port Scheculers Port Mode coana 03 04 as 1 Srki Preety SrktPrody I 3 Brel Preety F ret Preety Sret Preety Strict Proety Sanct Prony Srk Pretty set Prod srktPrody SK Pronty Srki Prerty Srki Preety Brkt Prorty mik Prexty Sret Prerty sret Preety Brkt Prorty sant Prod Montor Diagnostics Maintenance EREEREER IS hE REECE BE Be omme n Soret Pronty Port The logical port for
100. Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul System Configuration Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames Reauthentication Enabled If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port see Aging Period below Reauthentication Period Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds EAPOL Timeout Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are in the range 1 to 65535 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports Aging Period This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security modul
101. GSME16T2H User Manual 142 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul on land not near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water sea ocean Civic Address Location IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information Civic Address LCI The two letter ISO 3166 Country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK DE or c National subdivisions state canton region province prefecture County perish gun Japan district City township shi Japan Example Copenhagen City division borough city district ward chou Japan Neighborhood block Street Example Poppelvej Leading street direction Example N Trailing street suffix Example SW Street suffix Example Ave Platz House number Example 21 House number suffix Example A 1 2 Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University NGSME16T2H User Manual 143 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Additional location info Example South Wing Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming Jahn Postal zip code Example 2791 Building structure Example
102. GSME16T2H User Manual 279 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Te Adoretreat Retesh Gems VCI gt Diagsosscr gt Maintenance scffje gt gt 0 00 ffje2 0002 lll Ra Filtered Buttons The port select box determines which port is affected by clicking the buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for the selected port Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 280 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Security Security Access Management Statistics This page provides statistics for access management Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Configur ati _ Access Management Statistics ntertuor Received Packsts Allowed Packets Discarded Packets HTTPS e Q SNP 0 0 opoor 0 0 onevest 1 SSH E 0 Interface The interface type through which the remote host can access the switch Received Packets Number of received packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled Allowed Packets Number of allowed packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled Discarded Packets Number of discarded packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled Button
103. Help De slaaf IPHC MLD IGHP Snooping sFlow sFlow Agent VEL VLAN Control List Debug Switch debug facilities Type lt group gt to enter command group e g port Type lt group gt to get list of group commands e g port Type lt command gt to get help on a command e g port mode 7 Commands may be abbreviated e g por co instead of port configuration gt logout gt Username Password Login in progress Invalid username or password Username admin Password Login in progress Welcome to Command Line Interface v1 0 Type help or to get help There are 19 error entries in the syslog Type debug syslog show to display th en gt Connected 00 00 19 Auto detect 115200 8 N 1 Figure 3 1 Hyper Terminal Console Screen Note The Win 7 or later OS version doesn t provide Console Terminal tool please download the tool Hyper Terminal from Microsoft web site or other terminal tools such as PuTTY for console connection Type Hyper Terminal or Putty in Google web site thus you can find link to download it NGSME16T2H User Manual 20 Chapter 2 Preparing for Management Preparing for Management ER PUTTY Configuration alegon Basic options for your PuTTY session T Specify the destination you want to connect to emina Serial line Speed Keyboard Bell COM3 115200 Features onnection type
104. I MSTI6 No VLANs mapped MSTI7 No VLANs mapped Port Setting STP Port Mode Syntax STP Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable STP Port Edge lt port_list gt enable disable STP Port AutoEdge lt port_list gt enable disable STP Port P2P lt port_list gt enable disable auto STP Port RestrictedRole lt port_list gt enable disable STP Port RestrictedTcn lt port_list gt enable disable STP Port bpduGuard lt port_list gt enable disable STP Port Statistics lt port_list gt clear Example STP gt port mode 1 24 dis Disable STP on port 1 24 STP gt port edge 1 24en Enable Edge port on port 1 24 STP gt port autoedge 1 24 en Enable Auto Edge on P1 24 STP gt port p2p 1 24 en Enable P2P mode on P1 24 STP gt port p2p 1 24 auto Enable Automatic P2P detection STP gt port bpdu 1 24 en Enable BPDUGuard on P1 24 Port Path Cost Syntax STP Msti Port Cost lt msti gt lt port list gt path cost gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations lt path_cost gt STP port path cost 1 200000000 or auto Example Configure CIST 0 Port Path Cost NGSME16T2H User Manual 235 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI STP gt msti port cost 0 all auto Path cost auto STP gt msti port cost 0 all 100000 Path
105. LANs are based on the source port mask and there are no connections to VLANs This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets By default all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1 A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Private VLANs do not work across the stack NGSME16T2H User Manual 160 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Delete To delete a private VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next save Private VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID To include a port in a Private VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Adding a New Private VLAN Click to add a new private VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the private VLAN can be configured as needed The allowed range for a private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range Any values outside this range are not accepted and a warning message appears Click OK to discard the incorrect entry or click Cancel to return to t
106. Level to DSCP value The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed settings are Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch DSCP Classification A QoS Class DPL DSCP oN o o D we gt VLAN 1 0 EI 4 o 0 BEI 4 a 1 0 BE D D ee 1 D EE i 0 0 GE 1 0 GE D D eer 4 D ee 0 0 SE 1 0 BEI 0 0 GE 1 0 SE D D ee 1 0 GE Montor Tan ami Diagnostics Mantenance QoS Class Actual QoS class DPL Actual Drop Precedence Level Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch G DSCP Ciasalfcation 1 z Ee DSCP Select the classified DSCP value 0 63 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 185 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul QoS Control List Configuration QoS Control List Configuration This page shows the QoS Control List QCL which is made up of the QCEs Each row describes a QCE that is defined The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Qos Control List Comiguration Ketes at pram Sar 2 Indicates the index of QCE IndicatesPort Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for
107. Low Library Unit Apartment suite Example Apt 42 Floor Example 4 Room number Example 450F Place type Example Office Postal community name Example Leonia Post office box P O Box Example 12345 Additional code Example 1320300003 Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service e g E911 and others such as defined by TIA or NENA Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling NGSME16T2H User Manual 144 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch oe LLOPMED Configuration Fast Start Repeat Count Fasterartrepeatsourt Coordinates Location kansae degn Wem Lengstuse spres Eisi pa anita Mua Annen voss 7 Civic Address Location Emergency Call Service Emergency Cali Service Policies Delete ID WLAN ID L2 DSCP Policy Port Configuration Same Resesi Policies Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network polic
108. MAC Count Current Limit The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user modules are enabled on the port the Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 283 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Port Security Port Status This page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch G amp Configur
109. N eessennnrnnnnnnnrrnnnnrnnrrnnnnrnnrrnnnnrnnnrnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnennrnnnrnnenrrnnrnnenrnnnnnnennn 310 LACP System Status vel ecentec ela erence eerte nea een einen neenem eee 316 System Stat S ra REKE inne EEEE EEA ESE EA EAEE au EEA EENEI EAS 316 LAGP Port SAUS crire e a ee res 317 LACP SAUENE s 318 Loop Profet avsa 319 SIP Brldq Status sctinccccincchenckunniwindinnakwanianehaen heen mas 319 Potato ES EE eee ne ee ee ee ee ER 320 STP Port Stat So csscrcccpaaicors revs cieqaadszetioiaeeniedds sect pocentqendsbiacodeteeaietds Tess dernk dGeore 321 STP Port SEINE ne ee ee eee eee ee ee 322 ES TRER chew cers va raster airan e R we se ecw EE EEEE 323 oC nn er ne ee nee ere ee ere en eee 323 NGSME16T2H User Manual 6 Table of Contents MVR Group aE 5 aaeenenee nea ete eer renee oe ere re ee eer ee eee 324 Monitor IPMC IGMP Snooping cece enn etree ee sees terre tenenaaeeeeeeee renee 325 EL GET 2 1 RE eee 325 MLD Snooping Status unssussverunuiseevonniiatvvvenninmvnmome vaneinnantoivee 330 Mor EFP 22 335 EE RR eines een ee ee 335 LLDP MED NOelghb rs Vassnes Seabee ceed seeeteeaadaes 337 LLDP POE Le E E E A N EEEE A AEAEE EA EE EN 341 ELDR EBE rn ee a e a a ea a a eee eee 343 EL DP Slat Se sv r a A T E mo butemebursnnsit 345 Dynamic MAC Table LQm2JaanssasseadsganuaedaeraGeaenGehasdanssarnde 347 VLAN Membership Status x emeaiumnsremmmrinmseevi hev rceu weasnsb nnereeeiwea rasa tenereeetweds 349 VCL M
110. NIVEO PROFESSIONAL NnIveoN Niveo Professional NGSM16E16T2H 16 Port 10 100 1000Base T PoE 2 Gigabit SFP Advanced Web Management PoE Switch Version 1 0 ASS OVAL PROFESSIONAL FCC Warning This Equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy It may cause harmful interference to radio communications if the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measteesient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to
111. NMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet Engine ID Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID The string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users NGSME16T2H User Manual 50 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul SNMP Trap Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this page Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch SNMP System Configuration Mose Frat Trap Mode Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation Possible modes are Enable Enable SNMP trap mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap mode operation Trap Version Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are SNMPv1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 SNMPv2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c SNMPv3 Set SNMP trap supported version 3 Trap Community Indicates the community access string when sending SNMP trap packet The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Trap Destination Address Indicates the SNMP trap destination address Trap Destination IPv6 Address Provide the trap destination IPV6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadec
112. P Configuration DHCP Snooping Configuration Configure DHCP Snooping on this page Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When DHCP snooping mode operation is enabled the DHCP request messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allow reply packets from trusted ports Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation Port Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Trusted Configures the port as trusted source of the DHCP messages Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted source of the DHCP messages Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch 1 DHCP Snooping Configuration nede 0 2 Part Mode Configuration wen 2 muend T i T T I I e z I I Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 99 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul DHCP Relay Configuration Configure DHCP Relay on this page Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch DHCP Relay Configuration Relay Mode Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay mode operation When DHCP relay mode operation is enabled the agent forwards and transfers DHCP messages between the clients and the server
113. P destination filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP destination filter is specified TCP UDP destination filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears Range If you want to filter a specific range TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears TCP UDP Destination Number When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value TCP UDP Destination Range When Range is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value TCP FIN Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP SYN Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1
114. Pv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Prefix Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch The allowed range is 1 to 128 Router Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 NGSME16T2H User Manual 30 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Renew Click to renew IPv6 AUTOCOMF This button is only available if IPv6 AUTOCONF is enabled NGSME16T2H User Manual 31 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul NTP Configuration
115. Remap DP0 table Remap DP Aware DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value Depending on the DP level of the frame the remapped DSCP value is either taken from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DP0 table or from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DP1 table Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 181 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches The displayed settings are DACA Aaser Qu ingress Ciasedinasan ORC Trust Gel Cisean DPL rome DSCP Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 Trust Controls whether a specific DSCP value is trusted Only frames with trusted DSCP values are mapped to a specific QOs class and Drop Precedence Level Frames with un trusted DSCP values are treated as a non IP frame QoS Class QoS class value can be any of 0 7 DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 1 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 182 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul QoS DSCP Translation This page al
116. S command mode and type the ipconfig to check the NIC s setting Type the ping 192 168 2 1 to verify a normal response time 2 Check the security amp firewall settings of your computer 3 Try different Web browser like the Mozilla For more information please refer to Appendix B IP Configuration for Your PC NGSME16T2H User Manual 23 Chapter 2 Preparing for Management Preparing for Management Preparation for Telnet SSH Interface If your Window OS is Win XP Win 2000 or early version you can access the Telnet console by default command If your OS is Window 7 or later version please download the terminal tool such as HyperTeminal or Putty The switch support both Telnet and SSH console The SSH console can be treated as secured Telnet connection need to enable the SSH feature in Security Switch SSH Tradition way for Telnet Connection 1 Go to Start gt Run gt cmd And then press Enter 2 Type the Telnet 192 168 2 1 or the IP address of the switch And then press Enter Access Telnet or SSH by Terminal tool Putty 1 Open Telnet SSH Client PuTTY In the Session configuration choose the Telnet SSH in Protocol field In the Session configuration enter the Host Name IP Address of your switch and Port number default Telnet 23 SSH 22 Then click on Open to start the SSH session console AR PuTTY Configuration Category Session Basic options for your PuTTY session LT a Speci
117. STP or QoS but a few of them contains more than one The following description defines these privilege level groups in details System Contact Name Location Timezone Log Security Authentication System Access Management Port contains Dot1x port MAC based and the MAC Address Limit ACL HTTPS SSH ARP Inspection and IP source guard IP Everything except ping Port Everything except VeriPHY Diagnostics ping and VeriPHY Maintenance CLI System Reboot System Restore Default System Password Configuration Save Configuration Load and Firmware Load Web Users Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance Debug Only present in CLI NGSME16T2H User Manual 42 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Privilege Levels Every group has an authorization Privilege level for the following sub groups configuration read only configuration execute read write status statistics read only status statistics read write e g for clearing of statistics Insufficient Privilege Level The web page is non accessable Please use the valid privilege level User Privilege should be same or greater than the authorization Privilege level to have the access to that group Insufficient Privilege Level If you login with lower level privilege and try to access the high privilege level configuration feature the following message Insufficient Privilege Level will appear If yo
118. TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP RST Specify the TCP Reset the connection RST value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care NGSME16T2H User Manual 97 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul TCP PSH Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP ACK Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP URG Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care NGSME16T2H User Manual 98 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Switch Network DHC
119. The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port state for a description of the individual states The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned NGSME16T2H User Manual 286 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Port Counters EAPOL Counters These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states e Force Authorized e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X EAPOL Counters The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type Total dot1xAuthEapolFramesRx that have been received by the switch Response The number of valid EAPOL Response Identity dot1xAuthEapolRespldFramesRx ID frames that have been received by the switch The number of valid EAPOL response frames Responses dot1xAuthEapolRespFramesRx other than Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch The number of EAPOL St
120. User Manual 79 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Guest VLAN Enabled When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs gt VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Operation When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting
121. _bitmask gt Policy number bitmask 0x0 0xFF lt tagged gt Tagged of frames any enable disable lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any lt tag_prio gt VLAN tag priority 0 7 or any lt dmac_type gt DMAC type any unicast multicast broadcast etype Ethernet Type keyword lt etype gt Ethernet Type 0x600 OxFFFF or any but excluding 0x800 IPv4 0x806 ARP and 0x86DD IPv6 lt smac gt Source MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XXXXXXXXXXXX X IS a hexadecimal NGSME16T2H User Manual 222 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI digit or any lt dmac gt Destination MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XXXXXXXXXXXX X S a hexadecimal digit or any arp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt arp_opcode gt lt arp_flags gt 0 1 any ip lt protocol gt lt ip_flags gt icmp lt icmp_type gt lt icmp_code gt udp lt sport gt any lt dport gt or any tcp lt tcp_flags gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_redirect gt lt mirror gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Example Add one ACE ARP keyword Source IP address a b c d n or any Destination IP address a b c d n or any ARP operation code any arp rarp other ARP flags request smac tmacjlen ip ether IP keyword IP protocol number 0 255 or any IP flags ttlloptions
122. able UPnP TTL lt ttl gt UPnP AdvertisingDuration lt duration gt Example UPnP gt mode en UPnP gt ttl5 Default 4 UPnP gt adver 200 Default 100 Result UPnP Configuration UPnP Mode Enabled UPnP TTL 15 UPnP Advertising Duration 200 NGSME16T2H User Manual 259 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI sFlow Configuration sFlow Configuration Receiver Configuration Syntax sFlow Receiver release lt timeout gt lt ip addr host gt lt udp port gt lt datagram_size gt Example sFlow gt receiver 10 192 168 2 100 6343 1400 Result Receiver Configuration Owner lt none gt Receiver 192 168 2 100 UDP Port 6343 Max Datagram 1400 bytes Time left 0 seconds Receiver Release sFlow gt receiver Port Configuration sFlow gt flow 1 2 10 128 Enable FlowSample on port 1 2 Syntax sFlow Receiver release lt timeout gt lt ip addr host gt lt udp port gt lt datagram_size gt sFlow FlowSampler lt port list gt lt sampling_rate gt lt max hdr size gt sFlow CounterPoller lt port list gt lt interval gt sFlow Statistics Receiver clear sFlow Statistics Samplers lt port_list gt clear Example NGSME16T2H User Manual 260 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI rate 10 max size 128 sFlow gt coun 1 25 Enable Counte
123. ackets and screws come with the product package All screws must be fastened so the rack mount kit and your product are tightly conjoined before installing it on your 19 inch rack Ethernet cable Request The wiring cable types are as below 10 Base T 2 pair UTP STP Cat 3 4 5 cable EIA TIA 568 100 ohm Max 100m 100 Base TX 2 pair UTP STP Cat 5 cable EIA TIA 568 100 ohm Max 100m 1000 Base T 4 pair UTP STP Cat 5 cable EIA TIA 568 100 ohm Max 100m PoE To delivery power without problem the Cat 5e and Cat 6 cable is suggested The high quality Ethernet cable reduces the lost while power transmission SFP Installation While install the SFP transceiver make sure the SFP type of the 2 ends is the same and the transmission distance wavelength fiber cable can meet your request It is suggested to purchase the SFP transceiver with the switch provider to avoid any incompatible issue The way to connect the SFP transceiver is to Plug in SFP fiber transceiver fist The SFP transceiver has 2 plug for fiber cable one is TX transmit the other is RX receive Cross connect the transmit channel at each end to the receive channel at the opposite end For more information regarding to the product safety and maintenance guide please refer to Appendix A Product Safety NGSME16T2H User Manual 18 Chapter 2 Preparing for Management In Preparing for Management This section will guide your how to manage this product via serial
124. ad cast and multi cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Logandtrap The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal Community Specify the community when trap is sent the string lengh is from 0 to 127 default is public Event Last Time Indicates the value of sysUp Time at the time this event entry last generated an event Buttons Add new entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 66 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Security Network Port Security Limit Control Configuration This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch rd Part Security Lent Control Configuration Rath System Contiguration Pon Configurator Port Mode Umit Acton Stae Reopen gr 4 7 1 Osatied Deade 2 OQastisd Dewi 3 Osabled Dead 4 Orsatted Dead 5 Desabbedle Desanied a Osadi Desatsied 7 Osade Deatied 8 Dianei 9 Drabi 1 vant n Dead 12 Dead 13 Demand 14 Disatsiesd 15 Desbans 1 Dvsstsint IT Dsabbed Dvied m Onstisd s Doane 19 Dsabisdie Dead DN Osatied Desaied 21 Chsatied Dead 22 Osatied Dsadiet 2 Dsabded je Dubai M Osatiedie Deabied 5 Osebied vr Dadio 2 Osatiod e Dosisi
125. adecimal it will not be changed Result Non volatile static NGSME16T2H User Manual 246 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI VID MAC Address Ports 1 00 10 15 02 25 2a 1 5 1 Ob 16 21 2c 37 42 1 10 NGSME16T2H User Manual 247 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI VLAN Configuration VLAN Configuration VLAN Membership Syntax VLAN Add lt vid gt lt name gt lt ports_list gt VLAN Name Add lt name gt lt vid gt Example VLAN gt add 3 5 8 Add port 5 8 to VLAN 3 VLAN gt name add vlan3 3 vlan3 is the name of VLAN 3 Port Configuration Syntax VLAN FrameType lt port_list gt all tagged untagged VLAN IngressFilter lt port_list gt enable disable VLAN tx_tag lt port_list gt untag_pvid untag_all tag_all VLAN PortType lt port_list gt unaware c port s port s custom port Example VLAN gt framety 1 3 all VLAN gt ingr 1 3 en VLAN gt tx_t 1 3 untag_pvid VLANS gt portty 1 3 un NGSME16T2H User Manual 248 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Private VLAN Configuration PVLAN Configuration PVLAN Configuration Syntax PVLAN Configuration lt port_list gt PVLAN Add lt pvlan_id gt lt port_list gt PVLAN Delete lt pvian_id gt PVLAN Lookup lt pvlan id gt PVLAN Isolate lt port_list gt enable disable
126. aded SMBStaX dat 3415213 bytes Master initiated software updating starting Waiting for firmware update to complete Tftpd32 by Ph Jounin Current Directory DREA v Browse Server interface 1992 168 2 100 v Show Dir Tftp Server Tftp Client DHCP server Syslog server Log viewer start time progress Settings Help Starting flash update do not power off device Erasing image Programming image Note 1 The switch process the firmware upgrading through TFTP protocol When running firmware upgrading please open the TFTP tool as TFTP server for the switch For example TFTPd32 is a freeware TFTP server you can download it from the internet Browse the directory of the firmware file and select correct server interface If you failed to upload file remember to shut down the firewall of your computer The process may be terminated by your firewall Note 2 While firmware uploading process is started please don t shutdown the switch NGSME16T2H User Manual 265 Chapter 5 Web Configuration Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance In Web Configuration Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance The following chapter will guide you to this switch s configuration webpage regarding to Monitor Diagnostic and Maintenance options NGSME16T2H User Manual 266 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Monitor System Monitor System Inform
127. agement entry With the Start and End IP address you can assign a range of IP addresses HTTP HTTPS Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry NGSME16T2H User Manual 47 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul SNMP Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry TELNET SSH Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new group entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 48 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Security Switch SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices The switch supports SNMP and equips lots of OIDs for remote management All the OIDs are unique and corresponding to one feature command The switch can support SNMP V1 V2c and V3 The following commands show how to configure SNMP and its related parameters Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch i SNMP Systern Configuration Mode Eruitshed version
128. aijaaneesaniner 190 UPnP Configuration so vaare SSR 192 sFlow COMMQUEATON pace ccencecicaseerci ch reiegeati cherie tinh iden eaten eee eee 193 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI eee teeta eset terre eeecnaaeeeeeeeeeeteeneaaaees 196 System Config rat n siie aeaaea EEA REENE AEA EA KETE A RAEN EEN EEEN EEA ENEN 198 Power Reduction NN 205 Port Configuration Lunsessussssusteetmsundeeeierukrsnevsualkddeieideungtisuteusiedeajnde 207 Security GOnlqQuraUoh ad aasssesssansrssanalssraaeaataaleentaelensaduenie 210 Aggregation Gonflguratlon nnmmnuvivmsnesueen rvsuumnvevddunparkbeentenantnbineer 230 Loop Protectio Mereni a a e a a r t 232 Spanning Tree Lassen eee 233 WR Re ee aon ee ar re eee ere ee rer errr er een eee ene ee ee eee ee ere ee ere eer eee 237 IPG peer eee 239 LLDP Configuration 44 seer er ee ee eee 242 Power over Ethernet Configuration cece teenie eee eee t etna eset steer etnennaaeeeeeeeeeeneeee 244 MAC Address Table Configuration cece eee eee eee naeee sete eee eneeenaeeeeeeeeeenneee 246 VLAN Configuration sivicivctnccssiccessdiictonesutanaiasetore cosulweaieha dovenecabwee tan vince nteedeneresviniassenincerseetenanvesiwese 248 Private VLAN Configuration scsi 2itectie cei oe as shiwtde eds ls eee ee ede 249 NGSME16T2H User Manual 5 Table of Contents NOUGAT aesthetic cdd es tess vaanendeaceedyace send 250 Voice VLAN Configuration ere rn eee eee eens ener eee ten
129. aintenance_time gt Time in seconds 0 65535 that the LEDs shall be turned on when any port changes link state on_at_errors leave_at_errors on_at_error if LEDs shall be turned on if any errors has been detected leave_at_errors if no LED change shall happen when errors have been detected Example led_power gt main 20 led_power gt main 20 on 20 sec on ad errors enabled EEE Configuration EEE Port Configuration Syntax EEE Mode lt port_list gt enable disable NGSME16T2H User Manual 205 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable EEE disable Disable EEE Example Enable Port 1 5 EEE gt mode 1 5 en Urgent Queue of Port Syntax EEE Urgent queues lt port list gt lt queue list gt Parameters lt port list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt List of queues to configure as urgent queues 1 8 or none Example Enable Urgent_Queue on Port 1 5 EEE gt urge 1 5 2 NGSME16T2H User Manual 206 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Port Configuration Port Configuration Port Group poeswitch gt port Type up to move up one level or to go to root level poeswitch Port gt Link State Syntax Port State lt port_list gt enable disable Example Enable Disab
130. allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues Type the IPv6 Addree ping length default 56 bytes ping count default 5 and ping interval default 1 Then press Start to start ping remote host After you press Start 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs ICMPv6 Ping Output PING6 server 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp seq 0 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp seq 3 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad You can configure the following properties of the issued ICMP packets IP Address The destination IP Address Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds NGSME16T2H User Manual 356 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance VeriPHY Cable Diagnostic This page is used for running the VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Select the port and then press Start to run the diagnostics Thi
131. als NGSME16T2H User Manual 323 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance MVR Group Table Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch MVR Groups Information Rast fon VLAN 1 wht group mibess 224000 wth 0 enes p page Port Members goves OT Navigating the MVR Group Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR Group Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MVR Group Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over MVR Group Table Columns VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Groups Group ID of the group displayed Port Members Ports under this group Butto
132. alue If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value The number of organizationally received TLVs Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the local counters All counters including global counters are cleared upon reboot Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 346 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAND ID then by MAC address Navigating the MAC Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table The Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MAC Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting
133. ame A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch 3 SNMPvI View Configuration 4 wees Tie sv 1 eda vow ichasan Desete TIZ Pads ee wana Sa Rasat View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view types are Included An optional flag to indicate that this view sub tree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view sub tree should be excluded In general if a view entry s view type is excluded there should be another view entry existing with view type as included and it s OID sub tree should overstep the excluded view entry OID Subtree The OID defining the root of the sub tree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk Buttons Add new view Click to add a new view entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 57 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul SNMPv3 Access Configuration Configure SNMPv3 access table on this page The entry index keys are Group Name Security Model and Security Level Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch SNMPv3 Access Configuration
134. any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 45 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Security Switch HTTPS Configuration The web management page also provides secured management HTTPS login All the configuration commands will be secured and will be hard for the hackers to sniff the login password and configuration commands This page allows you to configure HTTPS mode A v Configuration i gt Beem HTTPS Configuration Power Reduction v Security Automatic Redirect Disabled vw Switch a Users Privilege Levels Save Reset Auth Method SSH a HTTPS m Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation Possible modes are Enable Enable HTTPS mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operation Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation Automatically redirect web browser to HTTPS when HTTPS mode is enabled Possible modes are Enable Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 46 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Security Switch Access Management Configuration The Access Management mode allows user to limit the switch access with specific
135. apter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance packets sent from the switch towards the backend server for a given port left most table or client right most table Possible retransmissions are not counted Last Supplicant Client Info Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate This information is available for the following administrative states e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth Last Supplicant Client Info A ow eee dot1xAuthLastEapolFrameSource The MAC address of the last supplicant client The VLAN ID on which the last frame from the last VLAN ID supplicant client was received 802 1X based The protocol version number carried in the most Version dot1 xAuthLastEapolFrameVersion recently received EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable 802 1X based The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL Identity frame MAC based Not applicable NGSME16T2H User Manual 290 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Selected Counters Selected Counters The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is in one of the following administrative states e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table and will be empty if no MAC addres
136. ard Entry lt port_list gt add delete lt vid gt lt allowed_ip gt lt allowed_mac gt Example NGSME16T2H User Manual 225 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Security Network gt ip source guard entry 5 add 2 192 168 2 101 001122334455 Result IP Source Guard Entry Table Type Port VLAN IP Address MAC Address Static 1 1 192 168 2 10 11 22 33 44 55 66 Static 5 2 192 168 2 101 00 0b 16 21 2c 37 ARP Inspection ARP Inspection Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration Security Network ARP Inspection Mode enable disable Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Security Network ARP Inspection Entry lt port list gt add delete lt vid gt lt allowed mac gt lt allowed ip gt Security Network ARP Inspection Status lt port list gt Security Network ARP Inspection Translation Example Security Network gt arp inspection mode en Security Network gt arp inspection port mode 1 10 en Security Network gt arp inspection entry 1 add 10 112233445566 192 168 2 10 Security Network gt arp inspection status ARP Inspection Entry Table Type Port VLAN MAC Address IP Address NGSME16T2H User Manual 226 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Static 1 10 Ob 16 21 2c 37 42 192 168 2 10 Security AAA Configuration Common Server Syntax Configuration Secu
137. art frames that have dot1xAuthEapolStartFramesRx been received by the switch The number of valid EAPOL Logoff frames that dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFramesRx have been received by the switch RE dot1xAuthinvalidEapolFramesRx The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by the switch in which the frame type is NGSME16T2H User Manual 287 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Type not recognized The number of EAPOL frames that have been Invalid dot1 xAuthEapLengthErrorFramesRx received by the switch in which the Packet Body Length Length field is invalid The number of EAPOL frames of any type that dot1 xAuthEapolFramesTx have been transmitted by the switch The number of EAPOL Request Identity frames Request ID dot1xAuthEapolReqldFramesTx that have been transmitted by the switch The number of valid EAPOL Request frames Requests dot1 xAuthEapolReqFramesTx other than Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch Backend Server Counters These backend RADIUS frame counters are available for the following administrative states e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth Backend Server Counters 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch receives the first request from the backend server following the first response from the Access dot1xAuthBackendAccessChallenges supplicant Indicates that the
138. asily located with available power outlets and network administrators don t need to use heavy AC power adapters anymore 2 Gigabit SFP Open Slots The switch supports 2 additional SFP open slots to uplink to servers storage or other switching devices for long loop reach applications The 2 SFP slots can support different types speed and distance SFP transceivers It also supports legacy 100M SFP transceiver If the 100M fiber infrastructure is constructed and 100M bandwidth is enough the 100M SFP transceiver can be an optional choice for the legacy 100M network environment NGSME16T2H User Manual 12 Chapter 1 Product Overview Product Overview Advanced Web Smart Features The switch features advanced web smart management features and SNMP for remote management Through a Web based interface an administrator can set up VLANs to segregate traffic QoS to prioritize mission critical data RSTP Loop Protection to avoid network loop link aggregation to create fat traffic pipelines bandwidth control to limit traffic load and the 802 1X and Access Management to secure your network Furthermore it provides Cable Diagnostic Ping Firmware upgrading Configuration Backup and Restore are very helpful for remote diagnostic and maintenance NGSME16T2H User Manual 13 Chapter 1 Product Overview Product Overview Product Specification Standard Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10Base T IEEE 802 3u 100Base TX IEEE 802 ab 1000Base T IEEE 802
139. ate the table staring with the entry after the last entry currently displayed NGSME16T2H User Manual 157 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul VLAN Port Configuration This page is used for configuring the selected stack switch unit port VLAN This page is used for configuring the switch port VLAN Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Ge Ethartype for Custom S ports Ox AS VLAN Port Configuration Por Port Type ingresa Finenng Frame Type gage ANG Tx Tag T 7 W KE ger 3 I Er pes v ze urare Ureware 5 Ureewere G Uroware 7 Ureware Urewere Ureware ERR EE ge RBeeeeeeee Ether type for Custom S ports This field specifies the ether type used for Custom S ports This is a global setting for all the Custom S ports Port This is the logical port number of this row Port Type Port can be one of the following types Unaware Customer port C port Service port S port Custom Service port S custom port If Port Type is Unaware all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed Ingress Filtering Enable ingress filtering on a port by checking the box This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded By default ingress filtering is disabled no checkmark NGSME16T2H Use
140. ating equipment DO NOT install this product in an environment with extreme temperature changes Extreme temperature changes even within the product s operating temperature range may cause malfunctions DO NOT install this product in a location near any sources of water or liquid DO NOT stack this product with other network devices directly on top of one another Stacking network devices directly without applying a mounting rack will cause this product to overheat DO NOT install this product on an unstable surface Doing so might cause this product to fall resulting malfunction Product Maintenance Guide DO NOT disassemble this product Doing so might cause malfunction and void your product s warranty It is recommended to keep your product clear of dust To remove dust from your product please use a dry brush and brush it off gently When not using this product please store it in an environment with low humidity cool temperature and free of dust Failure to do so might cause malfunction Before powering up this product please make sure that the electric power source meets this product s requirement DO NOT use other power adapters if this product comes with its own power adapter in the package NGSME16T2H User Manual 363 Appendix B IP Configuration for Your PC Appendix B IP Configuration for Your PC This appendix describes how to set the IP address of your PC so you can connect to product configuration webpage The
141. ation CLI 192 168 2 10 can access the web UI Security Switch gt access add 1 192 168 2 1 192 168 2 10 web SNMP System Configuration Mode Version Read Write Community Syntax Security Switch SNMP Mode enable disable Security Switch SNMP Version 1 2c 3 Security Switch SNMP Read Community lt community gt Security Switch SNMP Write Community lt community gt Example Security Switch gt snmp mode en Security Switch gt snmp ver 2c Security Switch SNMP gt read com abc Security Switch SNMP gt write com orwell Result SNMP Configuration SNMP Mode Enabled SNMP Version 2C Read Community abc Write Community orwell SNMP Community Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Add lt community gt lt ip_addr gt lt ip_mask gt Security Switch SNMP Community Delete lt index gt Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup lt index gt Example NGSME16T2H User Manual 214 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Security Switch gt snmp commu add abc Security Switch gt snmp commu add test 192 168 2 100 255 255 255 0 SNMP Trap Server Setting Enter the SNMP Trap Configuration Group Security Switch SNMP gt trap Type up to move up one level or to go to root level Security Switch SNMP Trap gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode enable disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Version 1 2c 3 Security Switch SNMP
142. ation The switch system information is provided here z I 8 y GR S si i 8 Ly s 3 h a p p The system contact configured in Configuration System Information System Contact The system name configured in Configuration System Information System Name The system location configured in Configuration System Information System Location The MAC Address of this switch The Chip ID of this switch The current GMT system time and date The system time is obtained through the configured NTP Server if any The period of time the device has been operational The software version of this switch The date when the switch software was produced NGSME16T2H User Manual 267 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone NGSME16T2H User Manual 268 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance CPU Load This page displays the CPU load using an SVG graph The load is measured as averaged over the last 100ms 1sec and 10 seconds intervals The last 120 samples are graphed and the last numbers are displayed as text as well In order to display the SVG graph your browser must support the SVG format Consult the SVG Wiki for more inf
143. ation collisions CRC errors Packets dropped packets sent bytes sent octets broadcast packets multicast packets CRC errors undersize packets oversize packets fragments jabbers collisions and counters for packets ranging from 64 65 to 127 128 to 255 256 to 511 512 to 1023 and 1024 to 1518 bytes History Records periodic statistical samples from a network and stores for retrieval History of above Statistics Alarm Definitions for RMON SNMP traps to be sent when statistics exceed defined thresholds Interval for sampling particular variable sample type value of statistics during the last sampling period startup alarm rising threshold rising index falling threshold falling index Events Controls the generation and notification of events from this device Event index log index event log time event description The NMS can get the above information through remotely polling The information from the switch can be collected analyzed and displayed as table or graphic etc NGSME16T2H User Manual 60 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul RMON Statistics Configuration Configure RMON Statistics table on this page The entry index key is ID Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch RMON Statistics Configuration Delete ID Data Source ADS ew rity Sare Resat Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted du
144. ation warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 34 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Power Reduction LED Power Reduction Configuration LEDs Intensity The LEDs power consumption can be reduced by lowering the LEDs intensity LEDs intensity could for example be lowered during night time or they could be turn completely off It is possible to configure 24 different hours of the day at where the LEDs intensity should be set LED Power Reduction Configuration LED Intensity Timers Delete Time Intensity 00 00 20 x Add Time Maintenance On time at link change On at errors 10 Sec Save Reset Time The time at which the LEDs intensity shall be set The time setting is step by one hour Intensity The LEDs intensity 100 Full power 0 LED off Maintenance Time When a network administrator does Maintenance maintenance of the switch e g adding or On at errors moving users he might want to have full tai 2 LED intensity during the maintenance Save Reset period Therefore it is possible to specify that the LEDs shall use full intensity a specific period of time Maintenance Time is the number of seconds that the LEDs will have full i
145. cation Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Note Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration page and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down but not considered dead Now if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel on going backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forever Therefore the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant s EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Single 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same
146. cation which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using the Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1 X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked on a given port the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid traffic received on the supplicant s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class which may be changed b
147. cnaaeeeeeeeeeeteeenaaees 252 QoS Configuration LP ee ener ie eee eee eee ee ee ee 254 Mirroring Conflguratlon uuenesmmnsmesnm sinus uiemvnvrianveaarianeeeisanskauat 258 UPnP Configuration vade 259 sFlow Configuration ccc cree eee rere eee aaeeeeee eee enececaaeeeeeeeeeeneeenaaaaes 260 Diagnostic Commands 0 ee eee terete aeee eee ee eeneecaaeeeeeeeeenenee 262 Maintenance Commands mumusasenmentmemnisninksisupivnennvvmijndersnvneshude 264 Chapter 5 Web Configuration Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance rrrrnnnnrnrrnnnnnnnnnnn 266 EE EE NE AE EE AE EE EE 267 Monitor System Lae Aer tue ttoe tt auteas aan ectme teal aes 267 Monitor System Information 0 c ccc cece e eee eee aee settee ee eeeccaaeeeeeeeeeeneeneaaaees 267 PULL 5 269 System Log Information snnrrrnnnnnnnonnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnennnnnnrrnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnrrrnnenessennnnnnnn 270 System Detailed RR 272 Monitor Port Stare innare NE bromine ena EERE NE TEA NERIENE 273 Port Stale oreca E a eee ee ee ee 273 Traffic Overview Lees oro enceaieade 274 Og 1 oh ee ee ee ee ee 275 OCD SAUS Vvs ean 276 Detailed Port Statistics cis saree kd Aiea i nee ad ees ited eens ernn 278 Monitor Security viiak ot ected ns ctencinceeeia eee Gir 281 Security Access Management Statistics ccc eee eee teeter eter eet eeeaaeeeeeeeeeeteeee 281 Security EG REE EE EE 282 SE NNN 302 Switch SNMP RMO
148. console management web page and Telnet SSH interface The switch provides both in band and out band configuration methods Out band Management You can configure the switch via RS232 console cable if you don t attach your admin PC to your network or if you lose network connection to your switch It wouldn t be affected by network performance This is so called out band management In Band Management You can remotely manage the switch via the Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Mozilla to configure and interrogate the switch from anywhere on the network e Preparation for Serial Console e Preparation for Web Interface e Preparation for Telnet SSH Interface NGSME16T2H User Manual 19 Chapter 2 Preparing for Management Preparing for Management Preparation for Serial Console In the package there is one RS 232 console cable Please attach one end of the console cable to your PC COM port the other end to the console port of the switch Go to Start gt Program gt Accessories gt Communication gt Hyper Terminal Give a name to the new console connection Choose the COM name Select correct serial settings The serial settings of the switch are as below Baud Rate 115200 Parity None Data Bit 8 Stop Bit 1 After connected you can see Switch login request E MoS ol Login the switch The default username is admin password admin 25200 yer File Edit View Call Transfer
149. cost 100000 Port Priority Syntax STP Msti Port Priority lt msti gt lt port_list gt lt priority gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations lt priority gt STP port priority 0 16 32 48 224 240 Example Configure CIST 0 Port Priority STP Msti Port Priority lt msti gt lt port_list gt lt priority gt STP gt msti port priority 0 5 240 Port 5 Priority 240 STP gt msti port priority 0 all 128 All Ports priority 128 Example Configure MSTI 1 Port Priority STP gt msti port priority 1 5 240 MSTI1 port 5 priority 240 NGSME16T2H User Manual 236 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI MVR MVR Configuration MVR Mode Syntax MVR Mode enable disable MVR VLAN Syntax Interface Setting MVR VLAN Setup lt mvid gt add del upd Name lt mvr_name gt Example MVR VLAN 2 MVR Name Source2 MVR gt vlan setup 2 add Name Source2 MVR Port Role Syntax MVR VLAN Port lt vid gt lt mvr_name gt lt port_list gt source receiver inactive Example Port 2 Source Port Port 6 7 Receiver Port MVR gt vlan port 2 2 source MVR gt vlan port 2 6 7 rec Immediately Leave Syntax MVR Immediate Leave lt port_list gt enable disable Example MVR gt immedi leave 1 10 en MVR Configurat
150. cs This page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Receive Total Transmit Total F Re Packets O Te Pacher H Rx Ocista Te Octsts Q Ree Unicast O Te Unicast Q Ree Musticant Te Multicast 0 Rx Broadcast O Te Broadcast Ree Pouse O Tx Pouse Q Rix 64 Bytes 0 Te 64 Bytes i Rx 63 137 Dyas TeGS 127 Bytes 9 Rex 128 285 Bytes Te 128 294 Bytes Rx 255 511 Byes O 74256611 Byes o Rx 992 1023 ytes Te 912 1023 Bytes 9 Rx 1024 1826 Byten Te 0026 1426 bytes Q Rex 1627 Bytes O Te 1827 Bytes LI TGN t Re Qt 0 Twa 9 Re ar mar 0 Re Q3 O Too o Re Q Te Ot 9 Ras Tos 0 Re Gt Te Q 0 Re Q7 O mar 0 Receive Error Counters Transmit Error Counters 9 Re EE Te LatmExe Coll 0 Rx Undersize Rx Oversize Re Frogner Rx Fitered Receive Total and Transmit Total Rx and Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets Rx and Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits Rx and Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets Rx and Tx Multicast The number of
151. d the switch uses the supplicant s MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality MAC based Auth Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly NGSME16T2H User Manual 77 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indi
152. d in the RMON Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch RMON History Configuration te p aoea eal se see ee tvert Buttons Add new entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 62 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul RMON Alarm Configuration Configure RMON Alarm table on this page The entry index key is ID Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch i RMON Alarm Configuration Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold The range is from 1 to 2 31 1 Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled the possible variables are InOctets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters InUcastPkts The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol InNUcastPkts The number of broad cast and multi cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol InDiscards The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal InErrors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer
153. d it from the RADIUS authentication server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet NGSME16T2H User Manual 306 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance RADIUS Accounting Statistics The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 RADIUS Accounting Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt 6 Conti RADIUS Authentication Statistics for Server 1 0 0 0 0 1812 Sern 9 Actosutresh P Radian Co Receive Packets Transmit Packets ETIN Access Accepts D Access Requests 0 Carver 63 Access Rejects D Access Retransmissions 0 re SA Ansess Challenges 0 Pending Requests 0 mte Access Responses Tinecuts 0 Bos Aihentonors Unknown Types Packets Dropped 0 Other into State added Round Trip Time one RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server 1 0 0 0 0 1813 Receive Packets Transmit Packets 1 Teeaporses 0 ata ri Nalformed Responses 0 Rewansmissions 0 Bos Airhentonors D Pending Requests 0 Unknown Types D Timeout 0 Packets J VI Other into gt Diagsosscs Sue eI t Manteranse Round Trip Time Ore Packet Counters RADIUS accounting server packet counter There are five receive and four transmit counters Responses Malformed Responses Bad Authenticators U
154. d the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication whenever the quiet period of the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 81 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Security Network Access Control List Configuration Configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE Manas ged GiqaDit Ethernet Switch nko 3 The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Policy ID Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed value
155. default port 49 is used on the TACACS Authentication Server The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the TACACS Authentication Server and the switch Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 109 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Aggregation Configuration Link Aggregation is also known as Port Trunking It allows user using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability The switch support both Static and Dynamic link aggregation LACP The switch also supports different Hash mechanism to forward traffic according to the MAC address or IP Protocol Port Number Static Aggregation This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt Aggregation Mode Configuration HA THUD Pon Nari Aggregation Group Configuration The aggregation hash mode settings are global whereas the aggregation group relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC
156. des VLAN Port Status Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Verterda VLAN USER VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID UVID Currently we support following VLAN User types CLI Web SNMP These are referred to as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server MVRP Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol MVRP allows dynamic registration and deregistration of VLANs on ports on a VLAN bridged network Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row PVID Shows the VLAN identifier for that port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 NGSME16T2H User Manual 351 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Port Type Shows the Port Type Port type can b
157. e Sampling Rate Configured sampling rate on the ports Max Hdr Size Configured size of the header of the sampled frame Counter Sampling Counter sampling performs periodic time based sampling or polling of counters associated with an interface enabled for sFlow Attribute associated with counter sampling is polling interval NGSME16T2H User Manual 194 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Polling Interval Configured polling interval for the counter sampling Editing Button You can modify each port s sampler configuration the table using the following button Edits the port sampler configuration Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch ip gt sFlow Sampler Configuration NGSME16T2H User Manual 195 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI In Feature Configuration CLI The Command Line Interface CLI is the user interface to the switch s embedded software system You can view the system information show the status configure the switch and receive a response back from the system by keying in a command NGSME16T2H User Manual 196 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI CLI Overview After login the switch through console CLI you can see the gt mark You can type the command after it There are some useful command such as Type lt group gt to enter command group e g port to the port configuration Type lt g
158. e Active The number of lease active option 53 with value 13 packets received and transmitted Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt Configuration Monter DHCP Snooping Port Statistics Port 1 Port 4 13 Autoaetresh Retresh Glee Buttons Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for the selected port NGSME16T2H User Manual 296 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance DHCP Relay Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP relay Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch DHCP Retay Statistics Auno retresh Riefresh Oow Server Statistics to Server Error from Server Agent Option Circuit ID Remote ID Circuit Remote ID q bl 0 v 0 fi ul gt Configuration Monitor N Client Statistica Receive Receive Replace Keep Drop Server Statistics Transmit to Server The number of packets that are relayed from client to server Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in errors while being sent to clients Receive from Server The number of packets received from server Receive Missing Agent Option The number of packets received without agent information options Receive Missing Circuit ID The number of packets received with the Circuit ID option missing Receive Missing Remote ID The number of packets
159. e Limiter Rate 9 1 PPS 10 300 KBPS ACL Policy Syntax Security Network ACL Policy lt port_list gt lt policy gt NGSME16T2H User Manual 221 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Example Security Network ACL gt policy 1 2 Access Control List Syntax Security Network ACL Add lt ace id gt lt ace id next gt port lt port list gt policy lt policy gt lt policy_bitmask gt lt tagged gt lt vid gt lt tag_prio gt dmac type gt etype lt etype gt lt smac gt lt dmac gt arp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt smac gt lt arp opcode gt lt arp flags gt ip lt sip gt lt dip gt lt protocol gt lt ip flags gt icmp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt icmp_type gt lt icmp_code gt lt ip flags gt udp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip flags gt tcp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip flags gt lt tcp_flags gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_redirect gt lt mirror gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 256 default Next available ID lt ace_id_next gt Next ACE ID 1 256 default Add ACE last port Port ACE keyword lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports policy Policy ACE keyword lt policy gt Policy number 0 255 lt policy
160. e NAK Tx NAK n Rr Release Tx Relea a Ree Inform Tenden 0 Ree Leese Query Tx Lease Query Re Lease Urassigned Te Lease Unassigned 0 Re Lease Unknown Tx Ra Lease Active Ta Lease Active Receive and Transmit Packets Rx and Tx Discover The number of discover option 53 with value 1 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Offer The number of offer option 53 with value 2 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Request The number of request option 53 with value 3 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Decline The number of decline option 53 with value 4 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx ACK The number of ACK option 53 with value 5 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx NAK The number of NAK option 53 with value 6 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Release The number of release option 53 with value 7 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Inform The number of inform option 53 with value 8 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Query The number of lease query option 53 with value 10 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Unassigned The number of lease unassigned option 53 with value 11 packets received and transmitted NGSME16T2H User Manual 295 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Rx and Tx Lease Unknown The number of lease unknown option 53 with value 12 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Leas
161. e any of Unaware C port S port Custom S port If Port Type is Unaware all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed C port is Customer Port S port is Service port Custom S port is S port with Custom TPID Ingress Filtering Shows the ingress filtering on a port This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN the frame is discarded Frame Type Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port are discarded Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged UVID Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID Port s UVID determines the packet s behaviour at the egress side Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or not When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration the following conflicts can occur Functional Conflicts between features Conflicts due to hardware limitation Direct conflict between user modules Buttons i Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately NGSME16T2H User Manual 352 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Mai
162. e gt Add New User Syntax Security Switch Users Add lt user_name gt lt password gt lt privilege_level gt Example Add New User Name Password with highest privilege Name Orwell Password possword Privilege 15 NGSME16T2H User Manual 210 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Security Switch gt users add Orwell password 15 Delete the User Syntax Security Switch Users Delete lt user_name gt Example Delete the User Orwell from User Name database Security Switch gt users del Orwell User Name Database Security Switch gt users conf Users Configuration User Name Privilege Level admin 15 Orwell 15 Privilege Level Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Group lt group_name gt lt cro gt lt crw gt lt sro gt lt srw gt cro Configuration Read Only crw Configuration Excute Read Write sro Status Statistics Read Only srw Status Statistics Read Write Example Set Privilege level of VLAN Group Security Switch Privilege gt level group VLANs 10 10 10 10 cro 10 crw 10 sro 10 srw 10 NGSME16T2H User Manual 211 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Privilege Level Configuration Table Security Switch gt pri level conf Privilege Level Configuration Privilege Current Level 15 Group Name Privilege Level CRO CRW SRO SRW Aggregation 5
163. e to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in an 802 1X based mode this is not so critical since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is by aging the entries NGSME16T2H User Manual 72 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul For ports in MAC based Auth mode reauthentication doesn t cause direct communication between the switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry Hold Time This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC Based Auth If a client is denied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration Security AAA page the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not c
164. e will be set to automatic lt xml version 1 0 gt lt configuration gt lt platform gt lt pid val 3 gt lt pid gt lt version val 1 gt lt version gt lt platform gt lt global gt lt mac gt lt age val 200 gt lt age gt gt NGSME16T2H User Manual 361 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance lt mac gt lt global gt lt switch sid 1 gt lt mac gt lt entry port 1 24 learn mode auto gt lt entry gt lt mac gt lt switch gt lt configuration gt Save Click to save the configuration file Upload Click to upload the configuration file NGSME16T2H User Manual 362 Appendix A Product Safety Appendix A Product Safety This appendix describes safety issues regarding to this product To use this product safely it is highly recommended to read this appendix before installing and using this product Failure to follow these precautions and warnings might cause product malfunction electrical shock or even fire If this product is working abnormally e g generating smoke please stop using this product and contact your distributor or retailer immediately DO NOT install this product under conditions listed below DO NOT install this product in an environment with conditions exceeding its specified operating environment DO NOT install this product in an environment that is subjected to direct sunlight or near any he
165. ectly to edge devices No Bridges attached Transition to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports havingoperEdge true than for other ports The value of this flag is based on AdminEdge and AutoEdge fields This flag is displayed as Edge in Monitor gt Spanning Tree gt STP Detailed Bridge Status Admin Edge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized Auto Edge Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU s are received on the port or not Restricted Role If enabled causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influence the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also Known as Root Guard Restricted TCN If enabled causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree s active topology as a result of persistentl
166. ed to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Select the ACL status from this drop down list Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 294 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance DHCP Snooping Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP snooping The statistics show only packet counters when DHCP snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled And it doesn t count the DHCP packets for DHCP client Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch l DHCP Snoop ng Port Statistics Port 1 Receive Packets I Transmit Packets Ree Cisoover gt Tk Gsoover Re Offer O Tx Offer D Ree Request Th Regui Re Decine Tx Dectine 0 Ru ACK Te ACK R
167. ed by the QCE and pressing Refresh button Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch QoS Control List Configuration Hetesi senn ron rme v rr ai Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS class DPL Classified Drop Precedence Level DSCP Classified DSCP value NGSME16T2H User Manual 187 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Modification Buttons You can modify each QCE QoS Control Entry in the table using the following buttons 8 inserts a new QCE before the current row Edits the QCE Moves the QCE up the list Moves the QCE down the list Deletes the QCE The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the QCE listings Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page This will help to check the lates conflict status after releasing the resources NGSME16T2H User Manual 188 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul QoS Storm Control Configuration Storm control for the switch is configured on this page PoE GigaBit Ethernet Switch Loop Protection J gt ening Tree Storm Control Configuration MVR gt IPMC Frame Type Enable Rate pps LLDP Unicast EI 1 EA POE MAC Table Multicast E 1
168. ed if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy Tag Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 VLAN ID VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 NGSME16T2H User Manual 147 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 DSCP DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behaviour for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0
169. ed per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the IGMP SFM Information Table gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed NGSME16T2H User Manual 329 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance MLD Snooping Status This page provides MLD Snooping status Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Eeva ad aa TBARS JESN The VLAN ID of the entry Working Querier Version currently Working Host Version currently Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE DISABLE denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled The number of Transmitted Queries The number of Received Queries The number of Received V1 Reports The number of Received V2 Reports The number of Received V1 Leaves NGSME16T2H User Manual 330 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Router Port Display which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet
170. em ID MAC address Partner Port The partner s port number connected to this port Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 317 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance LACP statistics This page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt amp ecocsosccoecessoscsscoeoscacoos Port The switch port number LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port Buttons Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for all ports NGSME16T2H User Manual 318 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Loop Protection This page displays the loop protection port status the ports of the switch Loop protection port status is The switch port number of the logical port The currently configured port action The currently configured port transmit mode The number of loops detected on this port The current loop protection status of the port
171. enhgur co m MST Port Configuration gt Dagene An MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured on and applicable to the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports Apart from the selected MSTI the STP MSTI port settings also relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST and MSTI port Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Autosetting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favour of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 124 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul MVR Multicast VLAN Registratio
172. er Limit Control is enabled on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port Limit The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The switch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses NGSME16T2H User Manual 69 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Action If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action Trap If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent every time the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new address will be learned Even if the link is physically disc
173. er Manual 87 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul AGE Configuration Configure an ACE Access Control Entry on this page An ACE consists of several parameters These parameters vary according to the frame type that you select First select the ingress port for the ACE and then select the frame type Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type selected A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch 3 ACE Configuration fon ingress Pore Gramo Type EE VLAN Perameters Fog Priorkv m isee Rown Ganced Ingress Port Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies All The ACE applies to all port Port n The ACE applies to this port number where n is the number of the switch port You can select one port or select multiple ports for the entry Policy Filter Specify the policy number filter for this ACE The policy ID should be the same when you want apply it to the ACL or Port Any No policy filter is specified policy filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE choose this value Two field for entering an policy value and bitmask appears Policy Value When Specific is selected for the policy filter you can enter a specific policy value The allowed range is 0 to 255 Policy Bitmask When Specific is selec
174. er abbreviation of the user module This is used in the Users column in the port status table NGSME16T2H User Manual 282 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Port Status The table has one row for each port on the switchand a number of columns which are Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port Users Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter see Abbr has enabled port security State Shows the current state of the port It can take one of four values Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in Shutdown The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web page
175. er mode User can install the syslog server in one computer then configure the server address and event types in the switch s system log configuration When the events occur the switch will send information or warning message to the syslog server The administrator can analysis the system logs recorded in the syslog server to find out the cause of the issues The switch Web Ul allows you to Enable the Syslog Server assign the IP address and assign the syslog level Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt System Log Configuration Server Mode Dreattes T Sme Reset Server Mode Indicates the server mode operation When the mode operation is enabled the syslog message will send out to syslog server The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledgments back sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments The syslog packet will always send out even if the syslog server does not exist Possible modes are Enable server mode operation Disable server mode operation Server Address Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server If the switch provide DNS feature it also can be a host name NGSME16T2H User Manual 33 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Syslog Level Indicates what kind of message will send to syslog server Possible modes are Info Send inform
176. es Port Security Port Status Port 1 Fen 3 Aanovetresh Ss F n M MAC Address VLAN ID State Time of Addition Apaioid LANG MAC adesea NTE MAC Address amp VLAN ID The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port If no MAC addresses are learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed State Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding In the blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic Time of Addition Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port Age Hold If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seconds expires and no frames have been seen the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin NGSME16T2H User Manual 284 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely a dash will be shown Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt amp b Configuration Port Security Port Status Port 1 Pont E Auto retresh Refies
177. esacsaas asososraresaaa MVR aa a VE Dagrosses gt Maistenance av 20 8 5 a 4 Bo ace e aoa AREPREt se EAEE aoDoo8o a aasooc a Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone NGSME16T2H User Manual 274 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance QoS Statistics This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports The displayed counters are Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch ecrocccoaececo es Sceoecoocevevececacecevepse F IE f Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Qn There are 8 QoS queues per port Q0 is the lowest priority queue Rx Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears
178. etwork traffic It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAND ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI Pars G rtigurase Part Mente Reourtty Cimemvery Prutesai Lese semen Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filtering Possible modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation VLAN ID Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is a conflict in configuration if the value equals management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 Aging Time Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning aging time The allowed range is 10 to 1000000 seconds It is used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled In other cases it will be based on hardware aging time The actual aging time will be situated between the age time 2 age time interval Traffic Class Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class All traffic on the Voice VLAN will apply this class NGSME16T2H User Manual 171 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Port Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode Possible modes are Disabled
179. evel of the system log Warning Warning level of the system log Error Error level of the system log All All levels Time The time of the system log entry Message The message of the system log entry NGSME16T2H User Manual 270 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Updates the system log entries starting from the current entry ID Clear Flushes all system log entries lt lt Updates the system log entries starting from the first available entry ID lt lt Updates the system log entries ending at the last entry currently displayed gt gt Updates the system log entries starting from the last entry currently displayed gt gt Updates the system log entries ending at the last available entry ID NGSME16T2H User Manual 271 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance System Detailed Log System s detailed log information is provided here Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Lp Ostated System Log information Retesh ke ce o gt a gt Configuration vo Tere 1970 01 01 700 0O 0140000 Message Swtrn st reste 3 cod boot ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry Message The detailed message of the system log entry Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic
180. fic If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears VLAN ID When Specific is selected for the VLAN ID filter you can enter a specific VLAN ID number The allowed range is 1 to 4095 A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value Tag Priority Specify the tag priority for this ACE A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority The allowed number range is 0 to 7 The value Any means that no tag priority is specified tag priority is don t care ARP Parameters The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type ARP is selected ARP RARP Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care ARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to ARP RARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to RARP Other Frame has unknown ARP RARP Opcode flag Request Reply Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care NGSME16T2H User Manual 91 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Request Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set Reply Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag Sender IP Filter Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE Any No sender IP filter is specified Sender IP filter is don t care Host Sender IP filter is set to Host
181. frent source add resses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch oe IGMP SFM information Auto refteah Hetean ps Stat rom VLAN 1 and Group 224000 wh 20 erases p page Navigating the IGMP SFM Information Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP SFM Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP SFM Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP SFM Information Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next IGMP SFM Information Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the NGSME16T2H User Manual 328 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over IGMP SFM Information Table Columns VLAN ID of the group Group address of the group displayed Switch port number Indicates the filtering mode maintain
182. from 33 to 126 Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially set new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch SNMPv3 Access Configuration Jefauk 10 grop ay Notat NoPriv delast ven None 2 Sea GOD oy Natt NoPriv orit ven Sea ven Desete detsut mo group am le Notat NoPri Home gt None Ads new MELDER Smee Reset Buttons Add new access Click to add a new access entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 59 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul RMON Statistics Configuration RMON is short of Remote Monitoring On Network An RMON implementation typically operates in a client server model Monitoring device Probe contains RMON software agents that collect information of the system and ports The RMON software agent acts as server and the network management system NMS that communicate with it acts as client The RMON agent of the switch supports 4 groups such as the Statistics History Alarm and Event RMON Group Function Elements Statistics Contains statistics measured by the probe for each monitored interface on this device Real time LAN statistics e g utiliz
183. from Voice VLAN Auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VolP phone attached to the specific port and configures the Voice VLAN members automatically Forced Force join to Voice VLAN Port Security The Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephonic MAG addresses in the Voice VLAN will be blocked for 10 seconds Possible port modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation Port Discovery Protocol Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol It will only work when auto detect mode is enabled We should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol to LLDP or Both Changing the discovery protocol to OUI or LLDP will restart auto detect process Possible discovery protocols are OUI Detect telephony device by OUI address LLDP Detect telephony device by LLDP Both Both OUI and LLDP Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 172 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Voice VLAN OUI Configuration Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this page The maximum entry number is 16 Modifying the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Ge Voice VLAN CUI Table Delete Telephony OUI Geeeription
184. from that or the closest next MAC Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch MAC Address Table i Sat tom VLAN 1 ard MAC sdis 00 00 00 00 00 00 with 20 ertmes par page Port Members Type VLAN MAC Address 11213j4 5 TJA Gjett 12 00 14 95 16 17 18 16 20 121 22120 124 25 2 sg n 7 eony i Ay NNN y Dugrosies b Maintenance MAC Table Columns Switch stack only The stack unit where the entry is learned Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or a dynamic entry MAC address The MAC address of the entry VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry Port Members The ports that are members of the entry NGSME16T2H User Manual 347 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Clear Flushes all dynamic entries lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in
185. fy your connection by host name or IP address Ne Host Name or IP address Port Keyboard Bell 192 168 2 1 Features Protocol Window Raw Telnet Rlogin SSH earance p Load save or delete a stored session Translation Saved Sessions Selection Colours Connection Proxy Telnet Rlogin Default Settings Close window on ext Always Never Only on clean exit en nos NGSME16T2H User Manual 24 Chapter 2 Preparing for Management Preparing for Management 2 After click on Open then you can see the cipher information in the popup screen Press Yes to accept the Security Alert If you choose Telnet connection there is no such cipher information and window It goes to next step directly The server s host key is not cached in the registry You have no guarantee that the server is the computer you think it is The server s rsa2 key fingerprint is ssh rsa 1040 dd 15 6b be 26 1d b0 0c ef af 59 f2 83 e7 a7 47 If you trust this host hit Yes to add the key to PuTTY s cache and carry on connecting If you want to carry on connecting just once without adding the key to the cache hit No If you do not trust this host hit Cancel to abandon the connection 3 After few seconds the Telnet SSH connection is established the login page of Telnet SSH is the same as console The command line of Telnet SSH and console are all the same 19216821 putty e
186. g Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul LLDP Parameters The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is a vendor neutral link layer protocol LLDP information is sent by devices from each of their interfaces at a fixed interval in the form of an Ethernet Frame Each frame contains one LLDP Data Unit LLDPDU Each LLDPDU is a sequence of Type Length Value TLV structures Each LLDP frame starts with the following mandatory TLVs Chassis ID Port ID and Time to Live The mandatory TLVs are followed by any number of optional TLVs This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings LLDP Configuration Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch d amp Tx Interval The switch periodically transmits LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx In
187. ge at regular intervals Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MLD SFP Information Table gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed NGSME16T2H User Manual 334 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor LLDP LLDP Neighbor This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The columns hold the following information Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames Remote Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are Other Repeater Bridge WAN Access Point Router Telephone DOCSIS cable device Station only EE Be el ge ee eS Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by NGSME16T2H User Manual 335 Chapter 5
188. ge immediately Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 311 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance RMON History Overview This page provides an overview of RMON history entries Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch G e gt Configuration nor RMON History Overview prera Ta Refresh jes Sat trom Control Index 0 and Sarpie index 0 wth 20 eanes per cage ae oe ow rs SM Sr a ea om p vil gt Dagrosoca gt Maintenance The displayed fields are History Index Indicates the index of History control entry Sample Index Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry Sample Start The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources Drops The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received Broadcast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address Multicast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address CRCErrors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits
189. gged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type One of the eight priority levels 0 through 7 DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 340 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance LLDP PoE This page provides a status overview for all LLDP PoE neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP PoE neighbor is detected The columns hold the following information Local Port The port for this switch on which the LLDP frame was received Power Type The Power Type represe
190. ggregation Loop Protection Spanning Tree MVR gt IPMC gt LLDP POE MAC Table gt VLANS gt Private VLANs gt VCL gt Voice VLAN gt QoS Mirroring UPnP sFlow sFlow Configuration Receiver Configuration IP Address Hostname 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 6343 Max Datagram Size 1400 bytes Port Configuration Port p Counter Poller Enabled Sampling Rate Max Header Enabled Interval oO 0 128 0 1 0 128 0 Type the IP address of sFlow collector in the Receiver Configuration The sFlow agent will send the collected information to it This next page displays the configured sFlow Samplers on the switch NGSME16T2H User Manual 193 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch i sFlow Samp er Configuration Flow Pore sow instance sFlow Ports List of the port numbers on which sFlow is configured sFlow Instance Configured sFlow instance for the port number Flow Sampling Packet flow sampling refers to arbitrarily choosing some packets out of a specified number reading the first Max Hdr Size bytes and exporting the sampled datagram for analysis The attributes associated with the flow sampling are sampler type sampling rate maximum header size Sampler Type Configured sampler type on the port and could be any of the types None RX TX ALL Default value is non
191. given port are enabled IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port Max Dynamic Clients Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients that can be learned on given port This value can be 0 1 2 or unlimited If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal to 0 it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Translate dynamic to static Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries NGSME16T2H User Manual 102 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Static IP Source Guard Table Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save The logical port for the settings The vlan id for the settings Allowed Source IP address usedMAC address Allowed Source MAG address Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Gurard table Specify the Port VLAN ID IP address and IP Mask for the new entry Click Save Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 103 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul ARP Inspection ARP Inspection This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch
192. gt option 1 3 sys desc en LLDP gt option 1 3 sys capa en LLDP gt option 1 3 mgmt add en NGSME16T2H User Manual 243 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Power over Ethernet Configuration Feature Command Line PoE Configuration PoE Configuration Syntax PoE Mgmt_mode class_con class_res al_con al_res lldp_res lldp_con Parameters class_con Class Actual Consumption class res Class Reserved Power al_con Allocation Actual Consumption al_res Allocation Reserved Power lldo con LLDP MED Actual Consumption lldp res LLDP MED Reserved Power Example PoE gt mgmt class_con PoE Power Supply Configuration Warning The default value is for reference only If the value is not comfort to your product specification please give the correct value before you start using PoE function Syntax PoE Maximum Power lt port_list gt lt port_power gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt port_power gt PoE maximum power for the port 0 15 4 Watt for PoE mode 0 30 0 Watt for PoE mode Example PoE gt max 1 2410 Max power of Port 1 24 to 10Watt PoE gt max 1 24 15 4 Max power of Port 1 24 to 15 4 Watt PoE Port Configuration Syntax PoE Mode lt port_list gt disabled poe poe Parameters NGSME16T2H User Manual 244 Chapter 4 Feature Configurat
193. h fan MAC Address VLAN ID State Time of Addition 7 fio MAD akiresses atachad vol gt Diaprostca gt Maintenance Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Security Network NAS This page provides an overview of the current NAS port states Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt Configuration Monitor Network Access Server Switch Status Autoretresh Hatresh Ad ata ort State 1 Force Arhotzed Global Deabied force Authored CGintuihy Deussird I Foros Auhowed Giobaly Dost 4 Fore Authorized Giobyily Dessoied force Authored CGinbusby Drossird Force Ashod Cictsiby Dasdi i Fowe Ashowzed Guibal Deated Fore Authowzed Globally Dieabied F Force Athented City Dost D Foe Auvhoied Gudak Deabied Force Authorized Globally Deabied Force Authorized Ginhaly Desto Force Authorized Globally Dabid Force Authorized Globally Deasied Force Aushonzed Giobay Deoied Force Authonzed Giotssiy Dvassied Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authonzed Gicbaihy Dead force Authonsed Gintaly Deatsied og od Sy Ft ed Pod eg Fores Ashoized Coby Dasdi Force Authoiaed Globally Dead Force Aa Grhaly Death Force Authontedd Ciotuaby Dost Force Authorized Globally Deaticd Force Authonzed Globally Deabied Foros Athoized Gittaaihy Dostskai feta AIS PN VL rv gt Diapeostcs gt
194. h IP gt ipv6 auto en IPv6 Address Setting Address Prefix Router Syntax IP IPv6 Setup lt ipv6 addr gt lt ipv6_prefix gt lt ipv6 router gt Example poeswitch IP gt ipv6 setup 2001 DB8 250 8bff fee8 f800 48 2001 DB8 250 8bff fee8 f8ff IPv6 Ping Test Syntax NGSME16T2H User Manual 201 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI IP IPv6 Ping6 lt ipv6 addr gt Length lt ping_length gt Count lt ping_count gt Interval lt ping_interval gt Example poeswitch IP gt ipv6 ping6 2001 DB8 250 8bff fees f800 NTP NTP Mode Enable NTP Mode by below command poeswitch IP gt ntp mode en NTP Server Address Syntax Setting Type the NTP Server address settings by below command IP NTP Server Add lt server_index gt lt ip_addr_string gt IP NTP Server Ipv6 Add lt server_index gt lt server_ipv6 gt IP NTP Server Delete lt server_index gt Example poeswitch IP gt ntp ser add 1 192 168 100 1 poeswitch IP gt ntp ser add 2 168 95 1 1 NTP Setting Status Check the NTP Server settings by below command poeswitch IP gt ntp conf IP NTP Configuration NTP Mode Enabled Idx Server IP host address a b c d or a host name string 1 192 168 100 1 2 168 95 1 1 NGSME16T2H User Manual 202 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI 4
195. he editing and make a correction The Private VLAN is enabled when you click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new Private VLANs Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 161 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Port Isolation Configuration Overview This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Port Isolation Configuration Port Number TT ZT STAT STO TPT ST Se at az 3 tay v5 08 ar ve EE EEE EEE Sme Reset A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN The port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header This feature works across the stack Configuration Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN When checked port isolation is enabled on that port When unchecked port isolation is disabled on that port By default port isolation is disabled on all ports Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 162 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul VCL vCL MAC Based VLAN Config
196. he entry MLD Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN MLD Snooping Only up to 64 VLANs can be selected MLD Querier Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is MLD Auto ForcedMLDv1 Forced MLDv2 default compatibility value is MLD Auto RV Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a link The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 Ql Query Interval The Query Interval variable denotes the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds NGSME16T2H User Manual 135 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul QRI Query Response Interval The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds LLQI Last Listener Query Interval The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address Specific Queries sent in response to Version 1 Multicast Listener Done messages It is also the Maximum
197. hes support having two PoE power supplies One is used as primary power source and one as backup power source If the switch doesn t support backup power supply only the primary power supply settings will be shown In case that the primary power source fails the backup power source will take over For being able to determine the amount of power the PD may use it must be defined what amount of power the primary and backup power sources can deliver The valid values in this field is range from 0 to 2000 however the valid range of power supply is up to your product specification Check the power budget of your switch and type the correct number here PoE Port Configuration Port This is the logical port number for this row Ports that are not PoE capable are grayed out and thus impossible to configure PoE for PoE Mode The PoE Mode represents the PoE operating mode for the port Disabled PoE disabled for the port PoE Enables PoE IEEE 802 3af Class 4 PDs limited to 15 4W PoE Enables PoE IEEE 802 3at Class 4 PDs limited to 30W NGSME16T2H User Manual 150 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Priority The Priority represents the ports priority There are three levels of power priority named Low High and Critical The priority is used in the case where the remote devices requires more power than the power supply can deliver In this case the port with the lowest priority will be tu
198. hones PC based softphones or other communication NGSME16T2H User Manual 338 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support inventory management LLDP MED Capabilities LLDP MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s LLDP MED capabilities The possible capabilities are LLDP MED capabilities Network Policy Location Identification Extended Power via MDI PSE Extended Power via MDI PD Inventory A Oh Ege ee o Reserved Application Type Application Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this network policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The possible application types are shown below 1 Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed ona separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signalling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signalling than for the voice media 3 Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supp
199. id gt Event Security Switch RMON Event Add lt event_id gt NGSME16T2H User Manual 217 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI nonellog trap log_ trap lt community gt lt description gt Security Switch RMON Event Delete lt event_id gt Security Switch RMON Event Lookup lt event_id gt Security Network Configuration Limit Control Limit Control System Configuration Syntax Security Network Limit Configuration lt port_list gt Security Network Limit Mode enable disable Security Network Limit Aging enable disable Security Network Limit Agetime lt age_time gt Example Security Network gt limit mode enable Security Network gt limit agin enable Security Network gt limit agetim 1000 Result Port Security Limit Control Configuration Mode Enabled Aging Disabled Age Period 3600 Limit Control Port Configuration Syntax Security Network Limit Port lt port_list gt enable disable Security Network Limit Limit lt port_list gt lt limit gt Security Network Limit Action lt port_list gt none trap shut trap_shut Security Network Limit Reopen lt port_list gt NGSME16T2H User Manual 218 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Example Security Network gt limit port 1 enabl Security Network gt limit limit 15 Security Network gt limit action 1
200. igned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP In other words if value of OUI field is 00 00 00 then value of PID will be etype 0x0600 0xffff and if value of OUI is other than 00 00 00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to Oxffff Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16 character long string for every entry which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 Note special character and underscore _ are not allowed Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table Frame Type Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 166 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul VLC Protocol based VLAN Group Name to VLAN mapping Table PoE GigaBit Ethernet Switch v Configuration gt System Group Name fo VEAN mapping Table Auto refresh IT Refresh Power Reduction Port Members gt Security Delete Grep 1 2 3 4 5 6 if 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Aggregation Name ID Loop Protection IP22 20 1 wwe Spanning Tree MYR IPMC Add New Ent
201. iguration NGSME16T2H User Manual 252 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Port Mode Security Discovery Protocol 1 Auto Enabled Both 2 Auto Enabled Both 3 Auto Enabled Both 4 Auto Enabled Both OUI Configuration Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Add lt oui_addr gt lt description gt Voice VLAN OUI Delete lt oui_addr gt Voice VLAN OUI Clear Voice VLAN OUI Lookup lt oui addr gt Example Voice VLAN gt oui add 00 12 08 hello Result Voice VLAN gt oui lookup Voice VLAN OUI Table 00 01 E3 Siemens AG phones 00 03 6B Cisco phones 00 0F E2 H3C phones 00 60 B9 Philips and NEC AG phones 00 D0 1E Pingtel phones 00 E0 75 Polycom phones 00 E0 BB 3Com phones 00 12 77 e10 00 12 08 hello NGSME16T2H User Manual 253 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI QoS Configuration Feature Command Line QoS Configuration Port Classification Syntax QoS Port Classification Class lt port_list gt lt class gt QoS Port Classification DPL lt port_list gt lt dpl gt QoS Port Classification PCP lt port_list gt lt pcp gt QoS Port Classification DEI lt port_list gt lt dei gt QoS Port Classification Tag lt port_list gt enable disable QoS Port Classification Map lt port_list gt lt pcp_list gt lt dei_list gt lt class gt lt dpl gt QoS Port Classification DSCP lt po
202. ilter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an SMAC value appears SMAC Value When Specific is selected for the SMAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value DMAC Filter Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE Any No DMAC filter is specified DMAC filter status is don t care MC Frame must be multicast BC Frame must be broadcast UC Frame must be unicast Specific If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DMAC value appears NGSME16T2H User Manual 90 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul DMAC Value When Specific is selected for the DMAC filter you can enter a specific destination MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value VLAN Parameters 802 1Q Tagged Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802 1Q tagged The allowed values are Any Any value is allowed don t care Enabled Tagged frame only Disabled Untagged frame only The default value is Any VLAN ID Filter Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE Any No VLAN ID filter is specified VLAN ID filter status is don t care Speci
203. imal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 NGSME16T2H User Manual 51 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Trap Authentication Failure Indicates that the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failure traps Possible modes are Enable SNMP trap authentication failure Disabled Disable SNMP trap authentication failure Trap Link up and Link down Indicates the SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Possible modes are Enable Enable SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Trap Inform Mode Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation Possible modes are Enable Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation Trap Inform Timeout seconds Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 0 to 2147 Trap Inform Retry Times Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allowed range is 0 to 255 Trap Probe Security Engine ID Indicates the SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Possible values are Enable Enable SNMP trap probe securi
204. in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 16 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled SelectSelectPort Copy Frames that hit the ACE are copied to the port number specified here The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range Disabled indicates that the port copy operation is disabled NGSME16T2H User Manual 89 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Logging Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame MAC Parameters SMAC Filter Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE Any No SMAC filter is specified SMAC f
205. ing point in the IGMP Group Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next IGMP Group Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over IGMP Group Table Columns VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Groups Group address of the group displayed Port Members Ports under this group NGSME16T2H User Manual 327 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields lt lt Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed IGMP SFM Information Table Entries in the IGMP SFM Information Table are shown on this page The IGMP SFM Souce Filtered Multicast Information Table also contains the SSM Source Specific Multicast information This table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port No Dif
206. ing management and terminologies Icons for Note Caution and Warning To install configure use and maintain this product properly please pay attention when you see these icons in this manual A Note icon indicates important information which will guide you to use this product properly A Caution icon indicates either a potential for hardware damage or data loss including information that will guide you to avoid these situations A Warning icon indicates potentials for property damage and personal injury NGSME16T2H User Manual 9 Before Starting Product Package Contents Before starting install this product please check and verify the contents of the product package which should include the following items One Network Switch One Power Cord CD ROM One User Manual CD One pair Rack mount kit 8 Screws Note If any item listed in this table above is missing or damaged please contact your distributor or retailer as soon as possible NGSME16T2H User Manual 10 Chapter 1 Product Overview In Product Overview This section will give you an overview of this product including its feature functions and hardware software specifications Product Brief Description Product Specification Hardware Description Hardware Installation NGSME16T2H User Manual 11 Chapter 1 Product Overview Product Overview Product Brief Description This Niveo Web Smart PoE Switch is 16 port 10
207. intenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance V2 Leaves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves Router Port Display which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port Both denotes the specific port is configured and learnt to be a router port Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears all Statistics counters Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 326 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance IGMP Group Information Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this page The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Ge IGMP Snooping Groups Information Augo refresh Ashesh pcc Start ton VLAN 1 ane group adress 224000 wh 20 ertnes per pa i yup De Navigating the IGMP Group Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the start
208. ion CLI Featuring Configuration CLI lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disables Disable PoE poe Enables PoE IEEE 802 3af Class 4 limited to 15 4W poe Enables PoE IEEE 802 3at Class 4 limited to 30W default Show PoE s mode Example Set Port 1 24 ro PoE mode PoE gt mode 1 24 poe PoE Status Primary Power Supply PoE gt prim Primary Power Supply 200 W Port Status PoE gt sta Port PD Class Port Status Power Used W Current Used mA 1 No PD detected 0 0 0 2 No PD detected 0 0 0 NGSME16T2H User Manual 245 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI MAC Address Table Configuration MAC Address Table Configuration Aging Time Configuration Syntax MAC Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt MAC address age time 0 10 1000000 O disable Example MAC gt age 100 change aging time to 100 seconds the aging time range is 10 1000000 MAC gt age 0 0 Disable Aging time MAC Learning Configuration Syntax MAC Learning lt port_list gt auto disable secure Example MAC gt lear 1 8 sec MACs gt lear 9 12 dis MACslearn 1 12 auto Static MAC Table Syntax MAC Add lt mac_addr gt lt port_list gt lt vid gt Example MAG gt add 0b16212c3742 1 5 1 This type will be changed to hexadecimal automatically MAC gt add 0b 16 21 2c 37 42 1 10 1 This type is hex
209. ion 1 0 gt and lt configuration gt These tags are mandatory and must be present at the beginning of the file Section tags lt platform gt lt global gt and lt switch gt The platform section must be the first section tag and this section must include the correct platform ID and version The global section is optional and includes configuration which is not related to specific switch ports The switch section is optional and includes configuration which is related to specific switch ports Module tags lt ip gt lt mac gt lt port gt etc These tags identify a module controlling specific parts of the configuration Group tags lt port table gt lt vlan table gt etc These tags identify a group of parameters typically a table Parameter tags lt mode gt lt entry gt etc These tags identify parameters for the specific section module and group The lt entry gt tag is used for table entries Configuration parameters are represented as attribute values When saving the configuration from the switch the entire configuration including syntax descriptions is included in the file The file may then be modified using an editor and loaded to a switch The example below shows a small configuration file only including configuration of the MAC address age time and the learning mode per port When loading this file only the included parameters will be changed This means that the age time will be set to 200 and the learn mod
210. ion MVR gt conf View the settings of above configuration MVR Configuration MVR Mode Enabled MVR Interface Setting VID Name Mode Tagging Priority LLQI 2 Source2 Dynamic Tagged 0 5 NGSME16T2H User Manual 237 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Port Setting of Source2 VID 2 Source Port 2 Receiver Port 6 7 nactive Port 1 3 5 8 26 Channel Setting of Source2 VID 2 lt Empty Channel Table gt MVR Immediate Leave Setting Port Immediate Leave 1 Enabled 2 Enabled 3 Enabled 4 Enabled 5 Enabled 6 Enabled 7 Enabled 8 Enabled 9 Enabled 10 Enabled 11 Disabled 12 Disabled NGSME16T2H User Manual 238 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI IPMC IGMP Snooping Configuration IGMP Snooping Syntax Enable IPMC Mode mldligmp enable disable Example IPMC gt mode igmp en Unregistered IPMCv4 Syntax Flooding Enabled IPMC Flooding mldligmp enable disable Example IPMG gt flood igmp en IGMP SSM Range Syntax Source Specific IPMC SSM mid igmp Range lt prefix gt lt mask len gt Multicast Example IPMC gt ssm igmp range 239 0 0 0 8 Range from 239 0 0 0 mask length 8 Leave Proxy Enable Syntax IPMC Leave Proxy mld igmp enable disable Example IPMC gt leave proxy igmp en Enable IPMC gt leave proxy igmp dis Disable Proxy Enable Syntax
211. ion Server Status Overview Fastnet Vatnet sor l IP Addresa I Sub t 00001082 Oeatted 3 00001802 Ossdted 00001812 Osatted 4 00001012 Dastted Oaatdod _ RADIUS Accounting Server Status Overview T Goonies 1 3 000009 Dastied 3 00001613 o0001813 Oeatied 5 00001013 Oastbed RADIUS Authentication Servers The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled RADIUS Accounting Servers The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server NGSME16T2H User Manual 30
212. ion when the switch do detect the network loop After the port is shutdown it may hard to manually reconnect it so that there is a shutdown time timeout design can help re enable the port link automatically With the Loop Protection feature it can help you to avoid the failure and protect your network General Settings v Configuration Global Configuration Enable Loop Protection Disable Power Reduction Ports Security v Aggregation Static LACP Loop Protection Spanning Tree Shutdown Time seconds gt IPMC gt LLDP PoE v lt gt z lt gt MAC Table gt VLANS 1 v Shutdown Port Enable i gt Private VLANs 2 Shutdown Port x Enable gt VCL gt Voice VLAN 3 v Shutdown Port Enable P QoS 4 v Shutdown Port Enable Mirroring Enable Loop Protection Controls whether loop protections is enabled as a whole Transmission Time The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port valid values are 1 to 10 seconds Shutdown Time The period in seconds for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is detected and the port action shuts down the port Valid values are 0 to 604800 seconds 7 days A value of zero will keep a port disabled until next device restart NGSME16T2H User Manual 114 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Por
213. iple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID If a port is included in a VLAN an image will be displayed If a port is included in a Forbidden port list an image will be displayed If a port is included in a Forbidden port list and dynamic VLAN user register VLAN on same Forbidden port then conflict port will be displayed as NGSME16T2H User Manual 349 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance VLAN Membership The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box When ALL VLAN Users are selected it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users and this is by default VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded on the respective VLAN member ports Navigating the VLAN Monitor page Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user t
214. isabled state and will be removed from the active topology Port Error Recovery Control whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and re enabled for normal STP operation The condition is also cleared by a system reboot Port Error Recovery Timeout The time to pass before a port in the error disabled state can be enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 118 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch G 6 MSTI Configuration Add VLAN sapersisri by specs or comma Unmapsed VLANs are mapped 1 the CIST The dets t badge nsance CEEE Configuration Revision m Save Reset Configuration Identification Configuration Name The name identifying the VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as well as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters Configuration Revision The revi
215. itch Receiver Router port Multicast packets If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port Multicast snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously This processing applies to IGMP and MLD NGSME16T2H User Manual 128 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Throttling Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 129 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Navigating the IGMP Snooping VLAN Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first disp
216. k Receive Tw The link parther s fallback receive Tw A receiving link partner may inform the transmitter of an alternate desired Tw sys tx Since a receiving link partner is likely to have discrete levels for savings this provides the transmitter with additional information that it may use for a more efficient allocation Systems that do not implement this option default the value to be the same as that of the Receive Tw_sys tx NGSME16T2H User Manual 343 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Echo Tx Tw The link partner s Echo Tx Tw value The respective echo values shall be defined as the local link partners reflection echo of the remote link partners respective values When a local link partner receives its echoed values from the remote link partner it can determine whether or not the remote link partner has received registered and processed its most recent values For example if the local link partner receives echoed parameters that do not match the values in its local MIB then the local link partner infers that the remote link partners request was based on stale information Echo Rx Tw The link partner s Echo Rx Tw value Resolved Tx Tw The resolved Tx Tw for this link Note NOT the link parther The resolved value that is the actual tx wakeup time used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP Resolved Rx Tw The resolved Rx Tw for this link Note NOT the li
217. l TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Capa Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted Mgmt Addr Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 140 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul LLDP Media Configuration This page allows you to configure the LLDE MED This function applies to VolP devices which support LLDP MED Managed GigaBit Ethernet Svittch gt r Emergency Cal Service Onergerey Osh terore Fast start repeat count Fast start repeat count Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VolP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy With this in mind LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and
218. layed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest VLAN Table match The will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Refresh 1 lt lt gt gt Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page VLAN ID Snooping Enabled IGMP Querier Compatibility RV QI sec QRI 0 1 sec LLQI 0 1 sec URI sec 1 v v IGMP Auto z 2 125 100 10 1 10 20 Save Reset IGMP Snooping VLAN Table Columns VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry IGMP Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Only up to 64 VLANs can be selected IGMP Querier Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is IGMP Auto Forced IGMPv1 Forced IGMPv2 Forced IGMPv3 default compatibility value is IGMP Auto RV Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value i
219. le Port 1 State After port 1 disabled the port can t access the switch Port gt state 1 en Port gt state 1 dis Link Speed and Duplex Syntax Port Mode lt port_list gt auto 10hdx 10fdx 100hdx 100fdx 1000fdx sfo auto ams 100 Ox ams 100fx ams 1000x 100fx Example Port gt mode 2 1000fdx Configure port 2 to 1000 Full Duplex Port gt mode 1 4 1000fdx Configure port 1 4 to 1000 Full Duplex Flow Control Syntax Port Flow Control lt port_list gt enable disable Example Port gt flow cont 1 en Enable Flow Control on Port 1 Port gt flow cont 1 dis Disable Flow Control on Port 2 NGSME16T2H User Manual 207 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Maximum Frame Size Syntax Port MaxFrame lt port_list gt lt max_frame gt Example Set port 1 24 s maximum frame size to 9K jumbo frame Port gt maxf 1 24 9600 Port Status Port Configuration Port State Mode Flow Control MaxFrame Power Excessive Link 1 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard Down 2 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard 1Gfdx Port Mode Port gt mode 2 Port Mode Link 2 Auto 1Gfdx Port Status All Information poeswitch Port gt config Port Configuration Port State Mode Flow Control MaxFrame Power Excessive Link NGSME16T2H User Manual 208 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI
220. led disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled gt Monitor 25 disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled 26 disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers Qn Shows disabled or actual queue shaper rate e g 800 Mbps Port Shows disabled or actual port shaper rate e g 800 Mbps NGSME16T2H User Manual 178 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul QoS Port Tag Remarking This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed settings are Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch 008 Egress Port Tag Remarking BEPRE Rts GAGE KE Berm nnn g 4 z J Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking Mode Shows the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level NGSME16T2H User Manual 179 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul QoS Port DSCP Configuration
221. lete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Port The logical port for the settings VLAND ID The vlan id for the settings MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets Adding new entry Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table Specify the Port VLAN ID MAC address and IP address for the new entry Click Save Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 106 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Security AAA Authentication Server Configuration This page allows you to configure the Authentication Servers Common Server Configuration These setting are common for all of the Authentication Servers Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Authentication Server Configuration Common Server Configuration RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration inae iF Addresabiosiname Peet Secret 1 RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration TACACS Authentication Server Configuration Enabled iP Addressikostname Port Secret Timeout The Timeout which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will conside
222. limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Port Copy Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Modification Buttons You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons 8 inserts a new ACE before the current row Edits the ACE row Moves the ACE up the list Moves the ACE down the list Deletes the ACE The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings NGSME16T2H User Manual 86 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page Note that non committed changes will be lost Clear Click to clear the counter Remove All Click to remove all ACEs NGSME16T2H Us
223. ll VLANs are untagged Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 159 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Private VLANs The Private VLAN feature provides the ability to extend the capabilities of a standard VLAN The additional concepts Primary VLAN Community VLAN and Isolated VLAN are introduced in Private VLAN The Primary VLAN can be considered the master in the master slave relationship with the other 2 sub types Community VLAN and Isolated VLAN The switch Ports assigned with the primary VLAN are able to access the ports in the 2 sub tyupes Both the Community VLN and Isolated VLAN can be considered slaves in the master slave relationship with the primary VLAN The switch ports assigned to a Community VLAN can see traffic from all other devices in the same Community The switch ports assigned to an Isolated VLAN can send traffic to the primary VLAN but CANNOT see traffic from other devices in the same Isolated VLAN In this section the switch allows you to assign Private VLAN Member Configuration and Port Isolation Configuration Private VLAN Membership Configuration The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here Private VLANs can be added or deleted here Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here Private V
224. lows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress The displayed settings are DSCP Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 Ingress Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and DPL map There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation 1 Translate 2 Classify 1 Translate DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of 0 63 DSCP values 2 Classify Click to enable Classification at Ingress side NGSME16T2H User Manual 183 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul There are the following configurable parameters for Egress side 1 Remap DPO Controls the remapping for frames with DP level 0 2 Remap DP1 Controls the remapping for frames with DP level 1 Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 184 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul QoS DSCP Classification This page allows you to configure the mapping of QoS class and Drop Precedence
225. lue is allowed don t care NGSME16T2H User Manual 92 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul RARP DMAC Match Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware address field THA settings 0 RARP frames where THA is not equal to the DMAC address 1 RARP frames where THA is equal to the DMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care IP Ethernet Length Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address length HLN and protocol address length PLN settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is not equal to Ethernet 0x06 or the PLN is not equal to IPv4 0x04 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 Any Any value is allowed don t care IP Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address space HRD settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is not equal to Ethernet 1 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 Any Any value is allowed don t care Ethernet Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP protocol address space PRO settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is not equal to IP 0x800 1 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 Any Any value is allowed don t care NGSME16T2H User Manual 93 Chapter 3 Featuring Config
226. me elapsed since the last change was detected Total Neighbors Entries Added Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot Total Neighbors Entries Deleted Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot Total Neighbors Entries Dropped Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to the entry table being full Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring Local Counters The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted NGSME16T2H User Manual 345 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port The number of LLDP frames received on the port The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port s link is down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length V
227. n MVR is shot of Multicast VLAN Registration The MVR is a protocol for layer 2 network that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with client subscriber VLANs MVR is typically used for IPTV like service In non MVR environment the IPTV source to different VLAN would be copied multiple copies based on how many client subscriber VLANs it would deliver The IPTV actually delivers the same source with multiple the same content IP streams the duplicated traffic occupies the bandwidth of the uplink port Once the traffic is heavy some unexpected lost or lag appears However after MVR enabled the client subscriber VLANs are registered to the same source VLAN then there is only one source stream will be delivered to the registered VLANs This page provides MVR related configurations Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt A O UE UE UE UE UE AE ME AEE AEA oe asm Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLAN In a multicast television application a PC or a television with a set top box can receive the multicast stream Multiple set top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port When a subscriber selects a channel the set top box or PC sends an IGMP join message
228. n IP filter for this ACE Any No destination IP filter is specified Destination IP filter is don t care Host Destination IP filter is set to Host Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address field that appears Network Destination IP filter is set to Network Specify the destination IP address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear DIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation DIP Mask When Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation NGSME16T2H User Manual 95 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul ICMP Parameters ICMP Type Filter Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE Any No ICMP filter is specified ICMP filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP value A field for entering an ICMP value appears ICMP Type Value When Specific is selected for the ICMP filter you can enter a specific ICMP value The allowed range is0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value ICMP Code Filter Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter wi
229. nformation Policy Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy When DHCP relay information mode operation is enabled if agent receives a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information it will enforce the policy And it only works under DHCP if relay information operation mode is enabled Possible policies are Replace Replace the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is received Keep Keep the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is received Drop Drop the package when a DHCP message that already contains relay information is received Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 101 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul IP Source Guard Configuration IP Source Guard Configuration This page provides IP Source Guard related configuration Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt amp IP Source Guard Configuration Wome oa Tradate dyeerne to skate Port Mode Configuration E ket Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard All configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled Port Mode Configuration Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a
230. nk parther The resolved value that is the actual tx wakeup time used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP EEE activated Show if the switch and the link partner have agree upon which wakeup times to use Red Switch and link partner have not agreed upon wakeup time Green Switch and link partner have agreed upon wakeup time Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 344 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance LLDP Statistics This page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole switch while local counters refer to per port counters for the currently selected switch Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch tbat Counters Neighbour emries were last changed at 110052 sec 207 Total Neighbours Entries Added a gt Configer ation Moniter Total Neighbours Entries Deleted 0 Total Neighbours Entries Dropped 0 Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out 0 LLO Statistics Local Counters BJGoGVBJSravau ecececcenresceoceososccos tooo m eocececececs cooco y cao 5 ooo coco Global Counters Neighbor entries were last changed on It also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added It also shows the ti
231. nknown Types Packets Dropped radiusAccClientExtRespons The number of RADIUS packets valid or es radiusAccClientExtMalform edResponses radiusAcctClientExtBadAut henticators radiusAccClientExtUnknow nTypes radiusAccClientExtPackets Dropped invalid received from the server The number of malformed RADIUS packets received from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS packets containing invalid authenticators received from the server The number of RADIUS packets of unknown types that were received from the server on the accounting port The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the accounting NGSME16T2H User Manual 307 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets sent to the radiusAccClientExtRequest Requests s server This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS packets radiusAccClientExtRetrans Retransmissions retransmitted to the RADIUS accounting missions server The number of RADIUS packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or Pending radiusAccClientExtPending received a response This variable is Requests Requests incremented when a Request is sent and
232. nn 24 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web Ul rrnnnnnanonnnnnrrrnnnnnnnornnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnerrnnnnrrrnnnnenenenn 26 System Configuration rrnrrarsnnnnnvrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnennsnnnnnnnrrnnnnennsennnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnennn 27 System Information EEE 27 Configuratio N eiere a EERE NEA EER REKEREKE REEE EA REN ENERET EREA PAER arenes 28 IPv6 Configuration ansssgdesreRse dere 30 NTP Goran sarssssvssesserndeseknene ewienieie Siento einen 32 System Log Configuration ccc eee eee e eee reece ease nese eee eeecaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeneeees 33 Power Reduction iresi anh e eee 35 LED Power Reduction Configuration errarsrsnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnonnnnnvrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnnnnennnenrnnnnrrnnnnne 35 Port Configuration vunsuuermseniskessekebesapmtdveepihueuinddtaetinkjv e 38 Security Configuration Lnsoegsaeasemetsrdsaaiauataemndesnatang 40 Sec rity SWIt hecc E E EEA caveat mae ene meee 40 Security Switch Users Configuration rerrrsrnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnnonnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnenrnnnvrrrnnnnenenerrnnnnnn 40 Security Switch Privilege Levels Configuration rrrrrrnrrrnnnnvrrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnrnrnnnnnnn 42 Security Switch Auth Method 0 0c nee eee aee eee ee ee eeteenaaeeeeeeeeeeteee 44 Security Switch SSH Configuration errrssrsnnnnrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnrnnnnnrrrnnnnnennrrrnnnnnrnnenne 45 Security Switch HTTPS Configuration
233. ns Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR Group Table gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed NGSME16T2H User Manual 324 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor IPMC IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping Status This page provides IGMP Snooping status Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Ge IGMP Snooping Status Aukn retren h Ashesh Geer M Statistics ee a er er a ID Version Version Status Transmitted Received Received Received Received Received Router Port t Diagroeses gt Maiatenanse VLAND ID The VLAN ID of the entry Querier Version Working Querier Version currently Host Version Working Host Version currently Querier Status Shows the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE DISABLE denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled Queries Transmitted The number of Transmitted Queries Queries Received The number of Received Queries V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports NGSME16T2H User Manual 325 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Ma
234. ntenance VCL MAC Based VLAN Status This page shows MAC based VLAN entries configured by various MAC based VLAN users Currently we support following VLAN User types Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch CLI Web SNMP These are referred to as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server MAC Address Indicates the MAC address VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID Port Members Port members of the MAC based VLAN entry Buttons Refresh Refreshes the displayed table NGSME16T2H User Manual 353 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance sFlow This page shows the sFlow Statistics Flow Sampling Packet flow sampling refers to arbitrarily choosing some packets out of a specified number reading the first Max Hdr Size bytes and exporting the sampled datagram for analysis The attributes associated with the flow sampling are sampler type sampling rate maximum header size Counter Sampling Counter sampling performs periodic time based sampling or polling of counters associated with an interface enabled for sFlow Attribute associated with counter sampling is polling interval sFlow Ports List of the port numbers on which sFlow is configured Sampler Type Configured sampler type on the port and could be any of the types None RX TX ALL NGSME16T2H User Manual 354 Chapter 5 Moni
235. ntensity after either a port has changed link state or the LED pushbutton has been pushed Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 35 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul EEE Configuration This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current EEE port settings Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt 3 EEE Configuration 1 4 6 D 10 wv 13 1 15 1 5 18 19 20 n 24 Save Reset EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is very low traffic utilization or no traffic EEE works by powering down circuits when there is no traffic When a port gets data to be transmitted all circuits are powered up The time it takes to power up the circuits is named wakeup time The default wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other link speeds EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make sure that both the receiving and transmitting device has all circuits powered up when traffic is transmitted The devices can exchange information about the devices wakeup time using the LLDP protocol For maximizing the power saving the circuit isn t started at once transmit data are ready for a port but is instead queued until 3000 bytes of data are ready to be transmitted For not introducing a large delay in ca
236. ntries Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet based VLAN entry To include a port in a IP subnet based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the IP subnet based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Adding a New IP subnet based VLAN Click Add New Entry to add a new IP subnet based VLAN entry An empty row is added to the table and the IP subnet based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any IP address mask can be configured for the IP subnet based VLAN entry Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The IP subnet based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on Save The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new IP subnet based VLANs NGSME16T2H User Manual 169 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Refreshes the displayed table NGSME16T2H User Manual 170 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Voice VLAN Configuration Voice VLAN Configuration The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN then the switch can classify and schedule n
237. nts whether the device is a Power Sourcing Entity PSE or Power Device PD If the Power Type is unknown it is represented as Reserved Power Source The Power Source represents the power source being utilized by a PSE or PD device If the device is a PSE device it can either run on its Primary Power Source or its Backup Power Source If it is unknown whether the PSE device is using its Primary Power Source or its Backup Power Source it is indicated as Unknown If the device is a PD device it can either run on its local power supply or it can use the PSE as power source It can also use both its local power supply and the PSE If it is unknown what power supply the PD device is using it is indicated as Unknown Power Priority Power Priority represents the priority of the PD device or the power priority associated with the PSE type device s port that is sourcing the power There are three levels of power priority The three levels are Critical High and Low If the power priority is unknown it is indicated as Unknown Maximum Power The Maximum Power Value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in watts required by a PD device from a PSE device or the minimum power a PSE device is capable of sourcing over a maximum length cable based on its current configuration The maximum allowed value is 102 3 W If the device indicates value higher than 102 3 W it is represented as reserved NGSME16T2H User Manual
238. o select the starting point in the VLAN Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next VLAN Table match The will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Navigating the VLAN Monitor page Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next VLAN Table match The will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Buttons gl Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately NGSME16T2H User Manual 350 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance VLAN Port Status This page provi
239. of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MLD Group Table gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed NGSME16T2H User Manual 332 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance MLD SFM Information Table Entries in the MLD SFM Information Table are shown on this page The MLD SFM Souce Filtered Multicast Information Table also contains the SSM Source Specific Multicast information This table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port No Diffrent source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch MLD SFM information Sturt rom VLAN 1 and Group MO wih 20 enes per page 900 4 VLAN Group Port No Mode Source Address Type No mre armer Navigating the MLD SFM Information Table Each page shows up to 64 entries from the MLD SFM Information table
240. on it will think that the switch no longer exists Due to the unreliable nature of UDP in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one half of the advertising duration In the implementation the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds Valid values are in the range 100 to 86400 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 192 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul sFlow Configuration Sampled Flow sFlow is a traffic monitoring technology mainly used to collect and analyze traffic statistics The switch supports sFlow feature The sFlow software agent collects traffic statistics and packet information from the sFlow enabled interfaces on the switch encapsulates them into sFlow packets The sFlow agent then sends the packet to a specified sFlow collector the IP Address you assigned in the switch UI The sFlow collector analyzes the sFlow packets and displays the result sFlow has the following two sampling mechanisms e Flow sampling Packet based sampling used to obtain packet content information e Counter sampling Time based sampling used to obtain port traffic statistics v Configuration gt System Power Reduction Ports gt Security A
241. on timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may radiusAuthClientExtTimeou Timeo ts retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is NGSME16T2H User Manual 305 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance counted as a Request as well as a timeout Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time fica RFC4668 Name Round Trip Time Radius AuthClientExtRoundTrip Time Description Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matche
242. onnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Boot the switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the switch 3 Click the Reopen button Trap amp Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken State This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for all actions Limit Reached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap amp Shutdown Re open Button If a port is shutdown by this module you may reopen it by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the case For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section Note that clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed so non committed changes will be lost Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page Note that non committed changes will be lost Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and rever
243. or uncheck as needed to modify the entry Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table Specify the VLAN ID MAC address and port members for the new entry Click Save Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 154 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul VLAN Virtual LAN The VLAN is short of Virtual LAN Local Area Network The VLAN technology allows you to divide the physical ports to different logical groups Each groups is a virtual LAN the clients within the VLAN is a broadcast domain While the clients in different VLANs need to communicate the VLAN Overlapping setting or a additional upper router is needed There are 2 typical types VLAN technology Port Based and Tag Based The Port based VLAN is the simplest approach to LAN implementation The idea is to assign the ports on a switch to different VLANs the settings is only applied to the ports of the switch Tag based VLAN follows IEEE 802 1Q technology to tag VLAN ID to the packets The tagged VID is not only apply to the switch but also can be forwarded to next switch and whole network depends on how you configuring the switch settings VLAN Membership Configuration The VLAN membership configuration for theswitch can be monitored and modified here Up to 4096 VLANs are supported This page allows for adding and deleting VLAN
244. ores Password The password of the user The allowed string length is 0 to 32 NGSME16T2H User Manual 40 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Privilege Level The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups i e that is granted the fully control of the device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account Check the next chapter to see how to configure privilege level Buttons Add new user Click to add a new user NGSME16T2H User Manual 41 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Security Switch Privilege Levels Configuration This page provides an overview of the privilege levels Managed Gigabit Ethernet Switch Group Name The name identifying the privilege group In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP R
245. ork Connectivity Devices or other types of links Coordinates Location Latitude Latitude Should be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or south of the equator Longitude Longitude Should be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction the either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian Altitude Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to select between two altitude types floors or meters Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance Map Datum The Map Datum is used for the coordinates given in these options WGS84 Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations N
246. ormation on browser support Specifically at the time of writing Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch p 4 CPU Load Auten amp MICTOSOR rtemet Explores need the Agote SVG Puga to sp r Ps page Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 269 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance System Log Information The switch system log information is provided here Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch ip System Log informatio Ay eben Rete Cle k lt cc gt gt E Level X The tole frame OF efk8es t tor Ihe gwen kvi stan hon O 1 an 0 ertres per page 1 Sven past node 3 04 DON 2 OG Link ep on per 3 11030000 Link cow no 1464100000 Link apo Dagnsasca t Mantenance The ID gt 1 of the system log entry Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt Configuration Byster Log PE faetnesn cinar gem fe me met Montor a ni The bok THY ape is tyr the given lever Ere Len Start bor 1 wh 20 ertres per sagn Swich past reste a cold boot Link ep on pot 22 Link down ce peri 22 Lik ep on port 22 10 1970 04 01 701 46 411000 0 Diagnostics Maintenance Level The level of the system log entry The following level types are supported Info Information l
247. orting interactive voice services 4 Guest Voice Signalling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media 5 Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops 6 Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services NGSME16T2H User Manual 339 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance 7 Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signalling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signalling than for the video media Policy Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is required by the device Can be either Defined or Unknown Unknown The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown Defined The network policy is defined TAG TAG is indicative of whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged or Untagged Untagged The device is using an unta
248. ount during an on going authentication In MAC based Auth mode the switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled RADIUS assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned QoS Class is disabled on all ports RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled RADIUS assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description NGSME16T2H User Manual 73 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul
249. ping each VLAN has its own root and blocking path the STP region size becomes lower the convergence time of topology change becomes faster as well There are some important abbreviations as below Common Spanning Tree CST Common Spanning Tree CST interconnects all adjacent MST regions and acts as a virtual bridge node for communications with STP or RSTP nodes in the global network Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST MSTP connects all bridges and LAN segments with a single Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST The CIST is formed as a result of the running spanning tree algorithm between switches that support the STP RSTP MSTP protocols MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance One VLAN can be mapped to a MSTI Each instance has its own root switch forwarding path blocking path and table An MST Region may contain multiple MSTI NGSME16T2H User Manual 116 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Spanning Tree Bridge Setting This page allows you to configure STP system settings The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch i STP Bridge Configuration Basic Settings Protocol Version The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP RSTP and MSTP Bridge Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with
250. pplied to IPv6 Multicast The commands are the same as above IGMP Snooping IPv4 Commands Just chooses mid instead of igmp when seeing NGSME16T2H User Manual 240 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI mld igmp in the syntax The IP Address should be IPv6 format for sure NGSME16T2H User Manual 241 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI LLDP Configuration LLDP Parameters LLDP Timers Syntax LLDP Interval lt interval gt LLDP Hold lt hold gt LLDP Delay lt delay gt LLDP Reinit lt reinit gt Example LLDP gt interval 30 LLDP gt hold 4 LLDP gt delay 2 LLDP gt reini 2 LLDP Mode Syntax LLDP Mode lt port list gt enable disable rx tx rx RX Only tx TX Only Example Enable LLDP on Ports LLDP gt mode 1 10 en Port 1 10 are enabled LLDP gt mode 1 26 en Port 1 26 are enabled CDP aware Syntax LLDP cdp_aware lt port_list gt enable disable Example Enable CDP on Port 1 5 LLDP gt cdp a 1 5 en CDP on Port 1 5 are enabled LLDP Optional TLV Parameters Syntax LLDP optional TLV lt port_list gt port descrisys name sys descr sys capa mgmt addr enable disable Example NGSME16T2H User Manual 242 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI LLDP gt option 1 3 port en LLDP gt option 1 3 sys name en LLDP
251. quirements to the aging period The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled The end host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that the end host logs off or powers down If it wasn t for aging the end host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from the end host and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period the end host is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch NGSME16T2H User Manual 68 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Port Configuration The table allows you to configure the Port Configuration parameters which are Port The port number to which the configuration below applies Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch i Port Security Limit Coatrol Configuration Marathi System Configuration Mode Controls wheth
252. r NGSME16T2H User Manual 25 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web Ul In Featuring Configuration Web UI The switch provides abundant software features after login the switch you can start configuring the settings or monitoring the status This is one question market on the right top of the screen you can also click the question mark to get help from the system NGSME16T2H User Manual 26 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul System Configuration System Information This page shows the system information and allows you to configure the new settings Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch i System Information Configuration System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is 0 to 255 System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone
253. r Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance STP Port Status This page displays the STP CIST port status for physical ports of the switch STP port status is Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch ne STP Port Status umeren D Rah J 1 Ki g 2 Deabied J Deatied arg 4 Ocatied fi Deatied 6 Drato matted Onudded Deatted 10 Oeatted Desdsed t Deabied 13 Jeste 14 Detta 15 Ocabted 16 Deatied 17 Oniedsext 13 Ocatied 19 Deatied y D Deatied gt Dingrossics 21 Omatied Maintenance rv rain M Oend 25 Ousted V Destted Port The switch port number of the logical STP port CIST Role The current STP port role of the CIST port The port role can be one of the following values AlternatePort BackupPort RootPort DesignatedPort Disabled CIST State The current STP port state of the CIST port The port state can be one of the following values Discarding Learning Forwarding Uptime The time since the bridge port was last initialized Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 321 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance STP Port Statistics This page displays the STP port statistics counters of bridge ports in the switch The STP port statistics counters are Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Ge real STP Statistics Are
254. r IP address of the entry Buttons Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Flushes all dynamic entries lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Tables gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed NGSME16T2H User Manual 299 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Network Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this page The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by IP address and then by MAC address Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch G amp Configuration Men Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Fete Fudrath jx Sat from Poni lel VLAN ard P 3495 0000 veh 20 smes p page Navigating the IP Source Guard Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic IP Source Guard table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table The Start from port address VLAN and IP address input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that o
255. r Manual 158 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Frame Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged untagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded By default the field is set to All Port VLAN Mode Configures the Port VLAN Mode The allowed values are None or Specific This parameter affects VLAN ingress and egress processing If None is selected a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in frames transmitted on the port This mode is normally used for ports connected to VLAN aware switches If Specific the default value is selected a Port VLAN ID can be configured see below Untagged frames received on the port are classified to the Port VLAN ID If VLAN awareness is disabled all frames received on the port are classified to the Port VLAN ID If the classified VLAN ID of a frame transmitted on the port is different from the Port VLAN ID a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in the frame Port VLAN ID Configures the VLAN identifier for the port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 Note The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID Tx Tag Determines egress tagging of a port Untag_pvid All VLANs except the configured PVID will be tagged Tag_all All VLANs are tagged Untag_all A
256. r alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or less than the falling threshold default Rising Threshold Rising threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 Rising Index Rising event index 1 65535 NGSME16T2H User Manual 64 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Falling threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 Falling event index 1 65535 Add new entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 65 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul RMON Event Configuration Configure RMON Event table on this page The entry index key is ID Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch RMON Event Configuraton Delete 1 Desc Type Community Evert Last Time abt nen entry are Rawa Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 Desc Indicates this event the string length is from 0 to 127 default is a null string Type Indicates the notification of the event the posible types are None The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters Log The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Snmptrap The number of bro
257. r it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not received within the subinterval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured NGSME16T2H User Manual 107 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are The RADIUS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server
258. r the closest next Dynamic IP Source Guard Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over IP Source Guard Table Columns Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed VLAN ID VLAN ID in which the IP traffic is permitted IP Address User IP address of the entry NGSME16T2H User Manual 300 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance MAC Address Source MAC address Buttons Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Flushes all dynamic entries lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Tables gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed NGSME16T2H User Manual 301 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Security AAA This page provides an overview of the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the Authentication configuration page Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch G RADIUS Authenticat
259. r the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs gt VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following criteria are used e The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group IDattributes must all be present at least once in the Access Accept packet e The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil the following requirements if Tag 0 is used the Tunnel Private Group IDdoes not need to include a Tag gt Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 gt Value of Tunnel Type must be set to VLAN ordinal 13 gt Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading 0 s are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 NGSME16T2H
260. rPoller of port 1 2 and set interval to 5 sFlow gt statistic sample 1 2 Per Port Statistics NGSME16T2H User Manual 261 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Diagnostic Commands Feature Command Line Ping Ping Test Syntax IP Ping lt ip_addr_string gt Length lt ping_length gt Count lt ping_count gt Interval lt ping_interval gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IPv4 host address a b c d or a host name string length PING Length keyword lt ping length gt Ping ICMP data length 2 1452 Default is 56 excluding MAG IP and ICMP headers count PING Count keyword lt ping count gt Transmit ECHO REQUEST packet count 1 60 Default is 5 interval PING Interval keyword lt ping interval gt Ping interval 0 30 Default is 0 Example Ping IP 192 168 2 100 IP gt ping 192 168 2 100 PING server 192 168 2 100 56 bytes of data 64 bytes from 192 168 2 100 icmp seq 0 time 0ms 64 bytes from 192 168 2 100 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 64 bytes from 192 168 2 100 icmp seq 2 time 0ms 64 bytes from 192 168 2 100 icmp_seq 3 time 0ms 64 bytes from 192 168 2 100 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad IPv6 Ping Test Syntax IP IPv6 Ping6 lt ipv6_addr gt Length lt ping_length gt Count lt ping_count gt Interval lt ping_interval gt Example NGSME16T2H User Manual 262
261. reless Access Point Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extentions defined by TIA 1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method gi ewo LLDP MED Endpoint Device Definition LLDP MED Endpoint Devices as defined in TIA 1057 are located at the IEEE 802 LAN network edge and participate in IP communication service using the LLDP MED framework Within the LLDP MED Endpoint Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes as defined in the following NGSME16T2H User Manual 337 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class For example will any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class II also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints Class I and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device Class III will also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints Class II and Generic Endpoints Class I LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class 1 The LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class I definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA 1057 however do not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such devices may include but are not limited to IP Communica
262. renh User ingress Port Frame Type Action Rate Limiter Port Copy Mirror CPU CPU Once Counter Conflict No emmes User Indicates the ACL user Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are All The ACE will match all ingress port Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames NGSME16T2H User Manual 293 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copi
263. riable to be sampled Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds posible sample types are Rising Threshold Rising threshold value Rising Index Rising event index Falling Threshold Falling threshold value Falling Index Falling event index Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 314 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance RMON Event Overview This page provides an overview of RMON event entries The displayed fields are Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch G amp RMON Event Overview Bertnes Rerah os Scart from Cono index 0 and Sarpie index 0 with 20 CANES per page Event Index Indicates the index of the event entry Log Index Indicates the index of the log entry Log Time Indicates Event log time Log Description Indicates the Event description Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 315 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance LACP System Status System Status This page provides a status overview for all LACP instances Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Ge gt Comfiguration
264. ring the next save ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 Data Source Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored If in stacking switch the value must add 1000 switch ID 1 for example if the port is switch 3 port 5 the value is 2005 Buttons Add new entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 61 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul RMON History Configuration Configure RMON History table on this page The entry index key is ID Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch 4 RMON History Configuration ee on BEST Adineweny Save Raset Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 Data Source Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored If in stacking switch the value must add 1000 switch ID 1 for example if the port is switch 3 port 5 the value is 2005 Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 1800 seconds Buckets Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 50 Buckets Granted The number of data shall be save
265. rity AAA Timeout lt timeout gt Security AAA Deadtime lt dead_time gt RADIUS Syntax Authentication Server Security AAA RADIUS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Example Security gt aaa radi 1 en 192 168 2 200 password 1812 RADIUS Accounting Syntax Server Security AAA ACCT RADIUS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Example Security gt aaa ACCT_radi 1 en 192 168 2 200 password 1813 TACACS Syntax Authentication Server Security AAA TACACS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Example Security gt aaa tacacs 1 en 192 168 2 200 password 49 AAA Configuration Security gt aaa con AAA Configuration NGSME16T2H User Manual 227 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Server Timeout 15 seconds Server Dead Time 300 seconds RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration Server Mode IP Address Secret 1 Enabled 192 168 2 200 2 Disabled 3 Disabled 4 Disabled 5 Disabled RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration Server Mode IP Address Secret 1 Enabled 192 168 2 200 iii 2 Disabled 3 Disabled 4 Disabled 5 Disabled TACACS Authentication Server Configuration Server Mode IP Address Secret 1 Enabled 192 168 2
266. rn off starting from the port with the highest port number Maximum Power The Maximum Power value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in watts that can be delivered to a remote device The maximum allowed value is 30 W Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 151 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul MAC Address Table Configuration The MAG Address Table is configured on this page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAG Table and configure the static MAC table here Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt r MAC Address Tabie Configuration Aging Con gw ason PI MEA SIIK ETNE Save Rems Aging Configuration By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Configure aging time by entering a value here in seconds for example Age time seconds The allowed range is 10 to 1000000 seconds Disable the automatic aging of dynamic entries by checking Disable automatic aging MAC Table Learning If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out another module is in control of the mode so that it cannot be changed by the user An example of such a module is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Each port can do learning based upon the following settings
267. ront panel of the L2 management switch consists of 16 10 100 1000 Base TX RJ 45 ports and 2 gigabit uplink SFP ports The LED Indicators are also located on the front panel NIVCEON s a 7 9 13 1 5 7 1 16 port 10 100 1000M and 2 port 100 1000M SFP 1 3 be L2 Full Man Switch 1 17 7 E Console E u 1 17FX Power Je gt 10 2 o 12 14 16 18 LED Indicators The LED Indicators present real time information of systematic operation status The following table provides description of LED status and their meaning LED Color Status Description No of LEDs Power Amber On Power on Power Green On Link Up 10 100 1000M 16 Green Blinking Data Activating PoE Amber On PD is connected 16 Green On linked to Power Device 17 18 SFP Green Blinking Data Activating 17 18 Rear Panel The rear panel of the Web Smart PoE Switch contains 2 ventilation fans a power switch and a IEC 60320 plug for power supply NGSME16T2H User Manual 17 Chapter 1 Product Overview Product Overview Hardware Installation To install the Web Smart PoE Switch please place it on a large flat surface with a power socket close by This surface should be clean smooth and level Also please make sure that there is enough space around the PoE Switch for RJ45 cable power cord and ventilation If you re installing this Web Smart PoE Switch on a 19 inch rack please make sure to use the rack mount kit L br
268. roup gt to get list of group commands e g port You can follow the instruction step by step to finish the command Type lt command gt to get help on a command e g port mode 7 Type up to move up one level or to go to root level Type logout in root level to leave the command line interface Click Enter key after finish the command Click Up key to repeat the previous commands Commands may be abbreviated e g por co instead of port configuration For quick configuration the abbreviated typo is helpful Example Configure the System Contact to Orwell You can go to system group or type the full name in root level Both of the methods can meet your need In system group mode System gt contact Orwell In root level gt sys contact Orwell Note This chapter just lists the relevant command lines of the feature settings for your reference You can see the detail explanation of the commands and features through the chapter 3 NGSME16T2H User Manual 197 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI System Configuration System Information System Group Enter the System Configuration Group to do further configuration gt system Type up to move up one level or to go to root level System gt System Contact Syntax System Name lt name gt Parameters lt name gt System name string 1 255 Example Contact Name Orwell S
269. rt_list gt enable disable Range of the Value lt class gt QoS class 0 7 lt dpl gt Drop Precedence Level 0 1 lt pcp gt Priority Code Point 0 7 lt dei gt Drop Eligible Indicator 0 1 Example QoS Port Classification gt clas 1 2 7 QoS Port Classification gt dpl 1 2 1 QoS Port Classification gt pcp 1 2 7 QoS Port Classification gt dei 1 2 1 QoS Port Classification gt tag 1 2 en QoS Port Classification gt dscp 1 2 en QoS Ingress Port Tag Classification Syntax QoS Port Classification Map lt port_list gt lt pcp_list gt lt dei_list gt lt class gt lt dpl gt Port Policing Syntax QoS Port Policer Mode lt port_list gt enable disable QoS Port Policer Rate lt port_list gt lt rate gt NGSME16T2H User Manual 254 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI QoS Port Policer Unit lt port_list gt kbps fps QoS Port Policer FlowControl lt port_list gt enable disable lt rate gt Rate in kbps or fps 100 3300000 Example QoS Port Policer gt mode 1 2 en QoS Port Policer gt rate 1 2 300 QoS Port Policer gt unit 1 2 kbps QoS Port Policer gt flow 1 2 en Port Scheduler Syntax Syntax QoS Port Scheduler Mode lt port list gt strict weighted Example QoS Port Scheduler gt mode 1 2 stric Strict Priority QoS Port Scheduler gt mode 1 2 wei Weighted QoS Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers
270. rtise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN Delete Check to delete the policy It will be deleted during the next save Policy ID ID for the policy This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the polices that shall be mapped to the specific ports Application Type Intended use of the application types 1 Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed ona separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy 3 Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services 4 Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies
271. ry LLDP POE Save Reset MAC Table St GE gt VLANs v Private VLANs This page allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the switch The displayed settings are Delete To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save Group Name A valid Group Name is a string of atmost 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 no special character is allowed whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be preused by any other existing mapping entry on this page VLAD ID Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4095 Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping To include a port in a mapping check the box To remove or exclude the port from the mapping make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table the Group Name VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry NGSME16T2H User Manual 167 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration
272. s Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clear all statistics NGSME16T2H User Manual 281 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Security Network Port Security Switch Status This page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch G Port Security Switch Status fan ete Hotes User Module Legend User Module Legend The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services User Module Name The full name of a module that may request Port Security services Abbr A one lett
273. s 2 NGSME16T2H User Manual 130 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul QI Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds QRI Query Response Interval The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds LLQI LMQI for IGMP Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval multiplied by the Last Member Query Count The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Buttons Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VALN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAND ID gt gt Update the table staring with the entry after the last entry currently displayed Save To save the configuration Reset Click to
274. s are 0 through 255 The default value is 0 NGSME16T2H User Manual 82 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Action Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit Rate Limiter ID Select which rate limiter to apply on this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 16 The default value is Disabled SelectSelectDisabledPort Copy Select which port frames are copied on The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number The default value is Disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Logging Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled Counter Counts the number of frames that match this ACE Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset
275. s as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch gt VLAN Membership Configuration Ranma en 22 Navigating the VLAN Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next VLAN Table match The will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over NGSME16T2H User Manual 155 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Delete To delete a VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next Save VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN VLAN Name Indicates the name of the VLAN Maximum length of the VLAN Name String is 32 VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet VLAN name can be edited for the existing VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries Port Members A row
276. s if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life time of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled NGSME16T2H User Manual 74 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Port Configuration The table has number of columns which allows you to configure the port mode based on IEEE 802 1X standard Select the port and configure the settings Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Notwork Access Server Configuration System Configuration Restan Port The port number for which the configuration below applies Admin State If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following modes are available Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame
277. s is currently selected To populate the table select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below Attached MAC Addresses Identity Shows the identity of the supplicant as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame Clicking the link causes the supplicant s EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no supplicants are attached it shows No supplicants attached This column is not available for MAC based Auth MAC Address For Multi 802 1X this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant For MAC based Auth this column holds the MAC address of the attached client Clicking the link causes the client s Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached VLAN ID This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module State The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated In the authenticated state it is allowed to forward frames on the port and in the unauthenticated state it is blocked As long as the backend server hasn t successfully authenticated the client it is unauthenticated If an authentication fails for one or the other reason the client will remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds NGSME16T2H User Manual 291 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Last Au
278. s page The entry index keys are Security Mode and Security Name Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch f SNMPVI Group Configuration et pute vi private publ perane detsut uuv dataa ra Sp AE Now OG ret Fossan Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons Add new group Click to add a new group entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 56 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul SNMPv3 View Configuration Configure SNMPv3 view table on this page Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch 3 View Type OID Suttree Seimi vere rhe 1 p Mote The entry index keys are View Name and OID Sub tree Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save View N
279. s will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that VeriPHY is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running VeriPHY Therefore running VeriPHY on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch EEE Cable States a Port Pair A I Length A Pair E Lenga Pak C Length Pair 0 Length D Port The port where you are requesting VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair The status of the cable pair OK Correctly terminated pair Open Open pair Short Shorted pair Short A Cross pair short to pair A Short B Cross pair short to pair B Short C Cross pair short to pair C Short D Cross pair short to pair D Cross A Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair A Cross B Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair B Cross C Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair C Cross D Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair D Length The length in meters of the cable pair NGSME16T2H User Manual 357 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Maintenance The section allows user to maintain the
280. sabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled gt Private VLANs VCL gt Voice VLAN v QoS Port Classification Port Policing Port Scheduler Port Shaping Port Tag Port DSCP DSCP Based QoS BERBERE Bro eo ion ten wwie g gt Diagnostics gt Maintenance m p 47 disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled Storm 18 disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled Sirona 49 disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled UPnP 20 disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled MRP 21 disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled SRP 22 disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled Ge 3 23 disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled gt sFlow Agent 24 disab
281. se that data less then 3000 bytes shall be transmitted data are always transmitted after 48 us giving a maximum latency of 48 us the wakeup time If desired it is possible to minimize the latency for specific frames by mapping the frames to a specific queue done with QOS and then mark the queue as an urgent queue When an urgent queue gets data to be transmitted the circuits will be powered up at once and the latency will be reduced to the wakeup time NGSME16T2H User Manual 36 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Port The switch port number of the logical EEE port EEE Enabled Controls whether EEE is enabled for this switch port EEE Urgent Queues Queues set will activate transmision of frames as soon as any data is available Otherwise the queue will postpone the transmsion until 3000 bytes are ready to be transmitted Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 37 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Port Configuration This page displays current port configurations and link status Some of the Ports settings can also be configured here Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Part Configuration Port Lik Dual Media Tiew Coniret Current Configured toeea fee Tx Configured t Gow Auto x x 2 mn ua x x
282. sign to add a new ACE to the list The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol cannot be edited or deleted the order sequence cannot be changed and the priority is highest Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Access Control Lat Canfiguration Aiso retreat Rete Clear Remcwe Ai O Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are All The ACE will match all ingress port Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port Policy Bitmask Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames NGSME16T2H User Manual 85 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Rate Limiter Indicates the rate
283. sion of the MSTI configuration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 MSTI Mapping MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped VLANs Mapped The list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to oneMSTI An unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 119 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch G i msn Configuration MST Party Cannon EN Ter CIST 15 MST 18 MST 128 MSTA 128 MST 19 ae 128 ME MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual
284. sminignmenatenmvineminn drue 165 VCL IP Subnet based VLAN isisiaccsssccerciaiecaracsintersisiecoresetesesstoimrareeuexeareee none re ulwenrereeeereceiness 169 Voice VLAN Gonlguratlon ua ascetics seit ae eed ae ed a Gregg 171 Voice VLAN Configuration 0 ccc eeeeenee rete eee eteeeceaaeee seer ee teeccaaeeeeeeeeeeeecennaeeeeeeees 171 Voice VLAN OUI Configuration 0 c cece er eee eee eeeecenee etree eee eeeccaaaeeeeeeeeeeteecenaaeeeeeeees 173 QOS acres ieee dee EEE 174 QoS Ingress Port Classification cece eect eee ee tea ae eee e eee eteneaaeeeeeeeeeeneee 174 QoS Ingress Port Policer Config 0c ccceeeeeee teeter teeter ete aae nets eee teeeeaaeeeeeeee rete 176 MGS Port Sc 10 EE EE 177 QoS Egress Port Shapes jasqessennmmdetbumtemenndustnnennsait 178 QoS Port Tag Remarking ssiistiereed stein emai eee ues 179 QoS Port DSCP Configuration 000 ec enna nent eee ennnenaeeeeeeee reece 180 QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification cece etter eee eeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeee 182 QOS DSCP Translation senii a a een ene 183 QoS DSCP 30 Gassen Larven 185 QoS Control List Configuration ccccccccceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeceaeeeeesecaeeeeeseeeeeeeete 186 QoS Storm Control Configuration ccc ec eee eet eee sete eee etenenaeeeeeeeee ence 189 Mirroring Conflguratlon kusssuenmesmeanminauisvvneutkknivnvnninondnnv
285. switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port Both denotes the specific port is configured and learnt to be a router port Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears all Statistics counters Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 331 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance MLD Group Table Entries in the MLD Group Table are shown on this page The MLD Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch MLD Snooping Groups information Suet Gorn VLAN 1 und group biases 900 with 20 anken per pegu Navigating the MLD Group Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest MLD Group Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value
286. t address Multi cast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address CRC Errors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets Under size The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets Over size The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets NGSME16T2H User Manual 310 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in D 3 Q 2 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 to 127 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 to 255 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 to 511 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 to 1023 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 to 1588 octets in length Refresh Click to refresh the pa
287. t Configuration The switch port number of the port Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port The valid values are Shutdown Port Shutdown the port until the Shutdown Time timeout Shutdown Port and Log Shutdown the port and log the status Log Only Only log the status Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU s or whether it is just passively looking for looped PDU s Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 115 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Spanning Tree The switch supports Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and Legacy Spanning Tree Protocol STP The STP and RSTP is combined and defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol The RSTP protocol is applied to single network domain no matter how many VLANs in your network In RSTP domain one of the switch acts as the Root Switch and block one of the link with highest path cost to avoid network loop There are maximum 23 level switches within one RSTP domain the network size may be limited Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP is a direct extension of RSTP It can provide an independent spanning tree for different VLANs With the Spanning Tree and VLAN map
288. t to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 70 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Security Network Network Access Server Configuration This page allows you to configure the IEEE802 1X and MAG based authentication system and port settings Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch G amp Network Access Server Configuration Meta System ConNyuration The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication One or more central servers the backend servers determine whether the user is allowed access to the network These backend RADIUS servers are configured on the Configuration gt Security gt AAA page The IEEE802 1X standard defines port based operation but non standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below MAG based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port and doesn t require the user to have special 802 1X supplicant software installed on his system The switch uses the user s MAC address to authenticate against the backend server Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses which makes MAC based authentication less secure than 802 1X authentication The NAS configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide NGSME16T2H User Manual 71 Chapter 3
289. tation DNS Server Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation VLAN ID Provide the managed VLAND ID The allowed range is 1 to 4095 DNS Proxy When DNS proxy is enabled the switch will relay DNS requests to the current configured DNS server on the switch and reply as a DNS resolver to the client device on the network NGSME16T2H User Manual 28 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Renew Click to renew DHCP This button is only available if DHCP is enabled NGSME16T2H User Manual 29 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul IPv6 Configuration Configure the switch managed IPV6 information on this page Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch E ee IPv6 Configuration I Current Resew 180 1682 1 Lrb Local Address fet 6052 cfs 1006 dad w The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration The Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration Auto Configuration Enable IPv6 auto configuration by checking this box If fails the configured IPv6 address is zero The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds the total time needed to complete auto configuration can be significantly longer Address Provide the I
290. tched it from the Round Trip radiusAccClientExtRoun RADIUS accounting server The granularity of this measurement is Time dTripTime 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet Buttons The server select box determines which server is affected by clicking the buttons Auto refresh Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for the selected server The Pending Requests counter will not be cleared by this operations NGSME16T2H User Manual 309 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Switch SNMP RMON RMON Statistics Overview This page provides an overview of RMON statistics entries Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch G RMON Statistics Status Overview fen retrett Rerah j Scart trom Cono lades 0 wn 20 erer p r page The displayed counters are Data Source The port ID which wants to be monitored Drop The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received Broad cast The total number of good packets received that weredirected to the broadcas
291. ted for the policy filter you can enter a specific policy bitmask The allowed range is 0x0 to Oxff Select the switch to which this ACE applies This parameter is reserved to the Stacking model If the switch doesn t support stacking the parameter will not display here NGSME16T2H User Manual 88 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Any The ACE applies to any port Switch n The ACE applies to this switch number where n is the number of the switch Frame Type Select the frame type for this ACE These frame types are mutually exclusive Any Any frame can match this ACE Ethernet Type Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE The IEEE 802 3 describes the value of Length Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to 1536 decimal equal to 0600 hexadecimal ARP Only ARP frames can match this ACE Notice the ARP frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type IPv4 Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv4 frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type IPv6 Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv6 frames won t match the ACE with ehternet type Action Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Ge 3 ACE Configuration Rate Limiter Specify the rate limiter
292. terval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds NGSME16T2H User Manual 138 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted an LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signalling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port Mode Select LLDP mode Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors CDP Aware Select CDP awareness The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames The switch doesn t transmit CDP frames CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbors table
293. th this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears ICMP Code Value When Specific is selected for the ICMP code filter you can enter a specific ICMP code value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value TCP UDP Parameters TCP UDP Source Filter Specify the TCP UDP source filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP source filter is specified TCP UDP source filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears Range If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears TCP UDP Source No When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value NGSME16T2H User Manual 96 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul TCP UDP Source Range When Range is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value TCP UDP Destination Filter Specify the TCP UD
294. the application layers on top of the protocol in order to achieve these related properties Initially a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbor has been detected in order share LLDP MED information as fast as possible to new neighbors Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbors it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility of the neighbors receiving the LLDP frame With Fast start NGSME16T2H User Manual 141 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul repeat countit is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission would be repeated The recommended value is 4 times given that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when an LLDP frame with new information is received It should be noted that LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including Netw
295. the counters for all ports Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals NGSME16T2H User Manual 275 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance QCL Status This page shows the QCL status by different QCL users Each row describes the QCE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch QoS Control List Status Comtered Ato refresh Aesoh Cost Refresh ner ce Frame Toe Port Feas Toner Comet Neo erties User Indicates the QCL user QCE Indicates the index of QCE Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 0xFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence
296. the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers Mode Shows the scheduling mode for this port Qn Shows the weight for this queue and port NGSME16T2H User Manual 177 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul QoS Egress Port Shapers This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed settings are Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch oe Aggregation 5 Spanning Tree MVR gt IPMC LLDP QoS Egress Port Shapers Shapers Qo aj Tre Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Port disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled di
297. the settings for the More Fragments MF bit and the Fragment Offset FRAG OFFSET field for an IPv4 frame No IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must not be able to match this entry Yes IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care NGSME16T2H User Manual 94 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul IP Option Specify the options flag setting for this ACE No IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry Yes IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care SIP Filter Specify the source IP filter for this ACE Any No source IP filter is specified Source IP filter is don t care Host Source IP filter is set to Host Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Source IP filter is set to Network Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear SIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation SIP Mask When Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation DIP Filter Specify the destinatio
298. thentication Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client successful as well as unsuccessful Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Ge NAS Statistics Por 1 Part 1 Auto retrenh Hrtan Port Stave 2 Buttons The port select box determines which port is affected when clicking the buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Click to refresh the page immediately This button is available in the following modes e Force Authorized e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X Click to clear the counters for the selected port This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth X Click to clear both the port counters and all of the attached client s counters The Last Client will not be cleared however This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X e MACGC based Auth X NGSME16T2H User Manual 292 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Click to clear only the currently selected client s counters Network ACL Status This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of ACEs is 2560n each switch Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch Ge ACL Status abre Aito retrenh Het
299. tion Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class Il The LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class Class I and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III The LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class I and Media Endpoint Class II classes and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user communication appliances such as IP P
300. tion Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table The Start from port address VLAN MAC address and IP address input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over NGSME16T2H User Manual 298 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance ARP Inspection Table Columns Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch G e Dynamic ARP Inspection Tabie ALENS Heres Start bon Port VLAN 1 MAC address 00000000000 vid IP address 00 00 an 20 es per page K vi MAG Agoues agarose LAN ID VLAN ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted MAC Address User MAC address of the entry IP Address Use
301. to undo the addition of new MAC based VLANs NGSME16T2H User Manual 163 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refreshes Refreshes the displayed the table starting from the VLAND ID input fields lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VALN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAND ID gt gt Update the table staring with the entry after the last entry currently displayed NGSME16T2H User Manual 164 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul VCL Protocol based VLAN Protocol to Group Mapping Table This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name unique for each Group mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the switch The displayed settings are v Configuration 3 gt System Protocol to Group Mapping Table Auto refresh E Refresh Power Reduction Delete Frame Type Value Group Name gt Security El Ethemet 0888 Eth0888 Aggregation Ethernet 0800 Eth0800 Loop Protection gt Spanning Tree MVR Add New Entry Save Reset gt IPMC v Private VLANs PVLAN Membersh Port Isolation v VOL MAC based VLAN v Protocol based Protocol to Gro Group to VLAN
302. tor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Diagnostic Ping This section provides some convenient tool for user to do switch diagnostic from remote site This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues Type the IP Addree ping length default 56 bytes ping count default 5 and ping interval default 1 Then press Start to start ping remote host After you press Start 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs ICMP Ping Output Result PING server 192 168 2 100 56 bytes of data 64 bytes from 192 168 2 100 icmp seq 0 time 0ms 64 bytes from 192 168 2 100 icmp seq 1 time 0ms 64 bytes from 192 168 2 100 icmp _seq 2 time 0ms 64 bytes from 192 168 2 100 icmp seq 3 time 0ms 64 bytes from 192 168 2 100 icmp seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad IP Address The destination IP Address Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds NGSME16T2H User Manual 355 Chapter 5 Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Monitor Diagnostic Maintenance Ping6 This page
303. trap Network Access Server Configuration also known as IEEE 802 1X NAS System Configuration Syntax Mode Security Network NAS Mode enable disable Security Network NAS Reauthentication enable disable Time Settings Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod lt reauth period gt Security Network NAS EapolTimeout lt eapol timeout gt Security Network NAS Agetime lt age time gt Security Network NAS Holdtime lt hold time gt Radius Assigned Security Network NAS RADIUS QoS global lt port_list gt enable disable Security Network NAS RADIUS VLAN global lt port_list gt enable disable Guest VLAN Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN global lt port_list gt enable disable lt vid gt lt reauth_max gt lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt Example Guest_VLAN Global Enabled Guest VLAN ID 100 Max Re Authentication Count 10 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL See Enable NGSME16T2H User Manual 219 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI Security Network gt nas gues glob en 100 10 en NAS Port Configuration Syntax Security Network NAS State lt port_list gt auto authorized unauthorized single multi macbased auto Port based 802 1X authorized Force Authorized unauthorized Force Unauthorized single Single 802 1X multi Multi 802 1X macbased MAC_ Based Authentication Example Security Network gt nas state 2 auto
304. twork Q Bluetooth Device Personal Area EP Qualcomm Atheros AR8171 8175 Ai Wi Fi Not connected x all Qualcomm Atheros AR9485WB E 3 items NGSME16T2H User Manual 364 Appendix B IP Configuration for Your PC 3 An Ethernet Status window will pop up Please click on the Properties button as shown in the figure down below General Connection IPv4 Connectivity IPv6 Connectivity Media State Internet No Internet access Enabled 05 02 57 Speed 1 0 Gbps Duration Sent Ae Received may a Bytes 36 553 207 490 636 952 aae sen 4 An Ethernet Properties window will pop up Please double click on the Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Networking Sharing Connect using EP Qualcomm Atheros AR8171 8175 PCI E Gigabit Ethemet This connection uses the following items M pl QoS Packet Scheduler Microsoft Network Adapter Multiplexor Protocol 4 Microsoft LLDP Protocol Driver Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 1 0 Driver Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Intemet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 lt v v v v v gt Install Uninstall Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Properties NGSME16T2H User Manual 365
305. ty engine ID mode of operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Trap Security Engine ID Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID SNMPv3 sends traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique engine ID for these traps and informs is needed When Trap Probe Security Engine ID is enabled the ID will be probed automatically Otherwise the ID specified in this field is used The string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Trap Security Name Indicates the SNMP trap security name SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique security name is needed when traps and informs are enabled Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 52 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul SNMPv3 Community Configuration In SNMP V3 it is start to support User Name and its privilege You can configure SNMPv3 community table on this page The entry index key is Community Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch SNMPv3 Community Configuration Delete Community Source P Source Mask Put c 0000 0 0 0 0 prasta 4 Add men commurny Save Reset Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next sa
306. u want continue be sure that you have the privilege Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 43 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Security Switch Auth Method This page allows you to configure how a user is authenticated when he logs into the switch via one of the management client interfaces The table has one row for each client type and a number of columns which are v Confi ti em E 1 Authentication Method Configuration Power Reduction Client Authentication Method Fallback Ports v Security console local vw Switch Users telnet local Privilege Levels Auth Method SSH HTTPS Access Management Save Reset ssh local web local Client The management client for which the configuration below applies Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the Authentication Method Configuration i Authentication Method following values Client Authentication Method Fallback console local none authentication is disabled and login is telnet none not possible ssh RADIUS web TACACS local use the local user database on the switch for authentication RADIUS use a remote RADIUS server for authentication TACACS use a remote TACACS server for authentication Fallback
307. uration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul IP Parameters The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type IPv4 is selected IP Protocol Filter Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE Any No IP protocol filter is specified don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears ICMP Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file UDP Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file TCP Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file IP Protocol Value When Specific is selected for the IP protocol value you can enter a specific value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value IP TTL Specify the Time to Live settings for this ACE zero IPv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry non zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care IP Fragment Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE This involves
308. uration The MAC based VLAN entries can be configured here This page allows for adding and deleting MAC based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This page shows only static entries Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members Delete MAC Address VLAN 13 54lsjelrfefsfvojer 12 13 14 e5 16 12 5 19 20 20 22 25 24 25 Curtecety 20 erines p sert AGO fea OFM Save Raon Delete To delete a MAC based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry will be deleted in the stack MAC Address Indicates the MAC address VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC based VLAN entry To include a port in a MAC based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the MAC based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Adding a New MAC based VLAN Click to add a new MAC based VLAN entry An empty row is added to the table and the MAC based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any unicast MAC address can be configured for the MAC based VLAN entry No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The MAC based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on Save A MAC based VLAN without any port members will be deleted when you click Save The button can be used
309. ve Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address A particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask Buttons Add new community Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 53 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul SNMPv3 User Configuration Configure SNMPv3 user table on this page The entry index keys are Engine ID and User Name v Configuration k gt Sjem SNMPv3 User Configuration Power Reduction Ports Dalate Engine ID User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy v Security ng Name Level Protocol Password Protocol Password v Switch E 800007e5017f000001 default_user NoAuth NoPriv None None None None Users a Privilege Level EE B 5 a al _ Add New Entry Save Reset SSH HTTPS Access Management v SNMP Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Engine ID An
310. ver Router port Multicast packets If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port NGSME16T2H User Manual 133 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Enable the fast leave on the port Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 134 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Navigating the MLD Snooping VLAN Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest VLAN Table match The will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over MLD Snooping VLAN Table Columns VLAN ID The VLAN ID of t
311. when they are not in the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t be flooded for security considerations Disabled Disable DHCP relay mode operation Relay Server Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address ADHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not in the same subnet domain Relay Information Mode Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation The option 82 circuit ID format as vlan_id module_id port_no The first four characters represent the VLAN ID the fifth and sixth characters are the module ID in standalone device it always equal 0 in stackable device it means switch ID and the last two characters are the port number For example 00030108 means the DHCP message receive form VLAN ID 3 switch ID 1 port No 8 And the option 82 remote ID value is equal the switch MAC address Possible modes are NGSME16T2H User Manual 100 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Enabled Enable DHCP relay information mode operation When DHCP relay information mode operation is enabled the agent inserts specific information option 82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and removes it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works when DHCP relay operation mode is enabled Disabled Disable DHCP relay information mode operation Relay I
312. y configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice NGSME16T2H User Manual 145 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Soft phone Voice Video Conferencing Streaming Veido O3 On 0 Control Singalling Conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may adve
313. y incorrect learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transits frequently NGSME16T2H User Manual 122 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul BPDU Guard If enabled causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not effect this setting A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well Point2Point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than to a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NGSME16T2H User Manual 123 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul Spanning Tree MSTI Ports STP MSTI Port Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well Managed GigaBit Ethernet Switch C
314. y the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X0 RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access Accept packet Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rule e All 8 octets in the attribute s value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 3 which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0 3 NGSME16T2H User Manual 78 Chapter 3 Featuring Configuration Web UI Featuring Configuration Web Ul RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it s invalid o
315. ystem gt contact Orwell System Name Syntax System Name lt name gt Parameters lt name gt System name string 1 255 Example Contact Name poeswitch System gt name poeswitch poeswitch gt After given system name the prompt character will be changed automatically System Location Syntax NGSME16T2H User Manual 198 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI System Location lt location gt Parameters lt location gt System location string 1 255 Example Location Name poeswitch System gt loca fll 01 Time Zone Offset Syntax System Timezone lt offset gt Parameters lt offset gt Time zone offset in minutes 720 to 720 relative to UTC Example Time Zone 100 poeswitch System gt time 100 IP Configuration IP Group Enter the IP Configuration Group poeswitch gt ip Type up to move up one level or to go to root level poeswitch IP gt DHCP Client Syntax IP DHCP enable disable poeswitch IP gt dhcp en IP Setting Address Mask Gateway Managed VID Syntax IP Setup lt ip_addr gt lt ip mask gt lt ip_router gt lt vid gt Example IP 192 168 2 2 Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 2 254 VID 1 NGSME16T2H User Manual 199 Chapter 4 Feature Configuration CLI Featuring Configuration CLI poeswitch IP gt setup 192 168 2 2 255 2

PDF - niveo professional

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents